US20060193876A1 - Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis - Google Patents

Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060193876A1
US20060193876A1 US11/418,848 US41884806A US2006193876A1 US 20060193876 A1 US20060193876 A1 US 20060193876A1 US 41884806 A US41884806 A US 41884806A US 2006193876 A1 US2006193876 A1 US 2006193876A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
polypeptide
seq
sequence
amino acid
sequences
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US11/418,848
Other versions
US7976844B2 (en
Inventor
Yasir Skeiky
Steven Reed
Mark Alderson
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Corixa Corp
Original Assignee
Corixa Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/597,796 external-priority patent/US7186412B1/en
Application filed by Corixa Corp filed Critical Corixa Corp
Priority to US11/418,848 priority Critical patent/US7976844B2/en
Publication of US20060193876A1 publication Critical patent/US20060193876A1/en
Priority to US11/981,211 priority patent/US20080161263A1/en
Priority to US11/981,142 priority patent/US7973153B2/en
Priority to US11/981,459 priority patent/US20080317716A1/en
Priority to US11/980,961 priority patent/US20090004226A1/en
Priority to US12/490,272 priority patent/US8071747B2/en
Publication of US7976844B2 publication Critical patent/US7976844B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/195Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
    • C07K14/35Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Mycobacteriaceae (F)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/02Bacterial antigens
    • A61K39/04Mycobacterium, e.g. Mycobacterium tuberculosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04Antibacterial agents
    • A61P31/06Antibacterial agents for tuberculosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/04Immunostimulants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/51Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising whole cells, viruses or DNA/RNA
    • A61K2039/53DNA (RNA) vaccination
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/555Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by a specific combination antigen/adjuvant
    • A61K2039/55505Inorganic adjuvants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/555Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by a specific combination antigen/adjuvant
    • A61K2039/55511Organic adjuvants
    • A61K2039/55566Emulsions, e.g. Freund's adjuvant, MF59
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00Fusion polypeptide

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to fusion proteins containing at least two Mycobacterium sp. antigens.
  • it relates to nucleic acids encoding fusion proteins that include two or more individual M. tuberculosis antigens, which increase serological sensitivity of sera from individuals infected with tuberculosis, and methods for their use in the diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of tuberculosis infection.
  • Tuberculosis is a chronic infectious disease caused by infection with M. tuberculosis and other Mycobacterium species. It is a major disease in developing countries, as well as an increasing problem in developed areas of the world, with about 8 million new cases and 3 million deaths each year. Although the infection may be asymptomatic for a considerable period of time, the disease is most commonly manifested as an acute inflammation of the lungs, resulting in fever and a nonproductive cough. If untreated, serious complications and death typically result.
  • tuberculosis can generally be controlled using extended antibiotic therapy, such treatment is not sufficient to prevent the spread of the disease. Infected individuals may be asymptomatic, but contagious, for some time. In addition, although compliance with the treatment regimen is critical, patient behavior is difficult to monitor. Some patients do not complete the course of treatment, which can lead to ineffective treatment and the development of drug resistance.
  • BCG Bacillus Calmette-Guerin
  • tuberculosis Diagnosis of tuberculosis is commonly achieved using a skin test, which involves intradermal exposure to tuberculin PPD (protein-purified derivative). Antigen-specific T cell responses result in measurable induration at the injection site by 48-72 hours after injection, which indicates exposure to mycobacterial antigens. Sensitivity and specificity have, however, been a problem with this test, and individuals vaccinated with BCG cannot be distinguished from infected individuals.
  • PPD protein-purified derivative
  • T cells While macrophages have been shown to act as the principal effectors of Mycobacterium immunity, T cells are the predominant inducers of such immunity.
  • the essential role of T cells in protection against Mycobacterium infection is illustrated by the frequent occurrence of Mycobacterium infection in AIDS patients, due to the depletion of CD4 + T cells associated with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection.
  • Mycobacterium -reactive CD4 + T cells have been shown to be potent producers of ⁇ -interferon (IFN- ⁇ ), which, in turn, has been shown to trigger the anti-mycobacterial effects of macrophages in mice.
  • IFN- ⁇ ⁇ -interferon
  • IFN- ⁇ interleukin-12
  • tuberculosis infection see Chan & Kaufmann, Tuberculosis: Pathogenesis, Protection and Control (Bloom ed., 1994), and Harrison 's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14 th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998).
  • the present invention therefore provides compositions comprising at least two heterologous antigens, fusion proteins comprising the antigens, and nucleic acids encoding the antigens, where the antigens are from a Mycobacterium species from the tuberculosis complex and other Mycobacterium species that cause opportunistic infections in immune compromised patients.
  • the present invention also relates methods of using the polypeptides and polynucleotides in the diagnosis, treatment and prevention of Mycobacterium infection.
  • the present invention provides compositions and fusion proteins comprising a mutated version of Ra35 (N-terminal portion of MTB32A) or Ra35FL (full length MTB32A), in which one, two, or three of the three amino acids histidine, aspartate, or serine at the active site has been mutated to a different amino acid.
  • Ra35FL the serine at position 183 has been mutated to an alanine residue, creating Ra35FLMutSA.
  • the DNA encoding Ra35FL has been mutated by changing a T to a G, resulting in a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid 183 of SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the present invention provides the fusion protein MTB72FMutSA, in which the Ra35 component of the fusion protein has a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid position 710 of the MTB72F sequence.
  • the present invention provides a nucleic acid encoding the fusion protein MTB72F, in which the nucleic acid encoding the Ra35 component has been mutated by changing a T to a G, resulting in a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid position 710 of the MTB72F sequence.
  • the present invention is based, in part, on the inventors' discovery that fusion polynucleotides, fusion polypeptides, or compositions that contain at least two heterologous M. tuberculosis coding sequences or antigens are highly antigenic and upon administration to a patient increase the sensitivity of tuberculosis sera.
  • the compositions, fusion polypeptides and polynucleotides are useful as diagnostic tools in patients that may have been infected with Mycobacterium.
  • the compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention are used in in vitro and in vivo assays for detecting humoral antibodies or cell-mediated immunity against M. tuberculosis for diagnosis of infection or monitoring of disease progression.
  • the polypeptides may be used as an in vivo diagnostic agent in the form of an intradermal skin test.
  • the polypeptides may also be used in in vitro tests such as an ELISA with patient serum.
  • the nucleic acids, the compositions, and the fusion polypeptides may be used to raise anti- M. tuberculosis antibodies in a non-human animal.
  • the antibodies can be used to detect the target antigens in vivo and in vitro.
  • compositions, fusion polypeptides and nucleic acids may be used as immunogens to generate or elicit a protective immune response in a patient.
  • the isolated or purified polynucleotides are used to produce recombinant fusion polypeptide antigens in vitro, which are then administered as a vaccine.
  • the polynucleotides may be administered directly into a subject as DNA vaccines to cause antigen expression in the subject, and the subsequent induction of an anti- M. tuberculosis immune response.
  • the isolated or purified M. tuberculosis polypeptides and nucleic acids of the invention may be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions for administration into a subject in the prevention and/or treatment of M.
  • the immunogenicity of the fusion protein or antigens may be enhanced by the inclusion of an adjuvant, as well as additional fusion polypeptides, from Mycobacterium or other organisms, such as bacterial, viral, mammalian polypeptides. Additional polypeptides may also be included in the compositions, either linked or unlinked to the fusion polypeptide or compositions.
  • FIG. 1 shows percent survival of Guinea pigs vaccinated with MTB72F polyprotein.
  • FIG. 2 shows CFUs from spleen cells ( FIG. 2A ) and lung cells after immunization with MTB72F, MTB59F, MTB72F DNA, or a composition comprising Ra12, TbH9, and Ra35 antigens.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of MTB72F.
  • FIG. 4 shows the nucleotide and amino acid sequence of Ra35 (195 amino acids from the N-terminal portion of MTB32A).
  • FIG. 5 shows an alignment of the amino acid sequences of MTB72F and the mutated version MTB72FMutSA.
  • FIG. 6 shows an alignment of the amino acid sequences of mature (full length) Ra35/MTB32A and the mutated version Ra35FLMutSA.
  • FIG. 7 shows long term survival of guinea pigs vaccinated with Mtb72F formulations.
  • the present invention relates to compositions comprising antigen compositions and fusion polypeptides useful for the diagnosis and treatment of Mycobacterium infection, polynucleotides encoding such antigens, and methods for their use.
  • the antigens of the present invention are polypeptides or fusion polypeptides of Mycobacterium antigens and immunogenic thereof. More specifically, the compositions of the present invention comprise at least two heterologous polypeptides of a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, e.g., a species such as M. tuberculosis, M. bovis, or M.
  • a Mycobacterium species that is environmental or opportunistic and that causes opportunistic infections such as lung infections in immune compromised hosts (e.g., patients with AIDS), e.g., BCG, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. celatum, M. genavense, M. haemophilum, M. kansasii, M. simiae, M. vaccae, M. fortuitum, and M. scrofulaceum (see, e.g., Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14 th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998).
  • compositions and fusion proteins comprising at least two heterologous Mycobacterium antigens, or immunogenic fragments thereof, where highly antigenic. These compositions, fusion polypeptides, and the nucleic acids that encode them are therefore useful for eliciting protective response in patients, and for diagnostic applications.
  • the antigens of the present invention may further comprise other components designed to enhance the antigenicity of the antigens or to improve these antigens in other aspects, for example, the isolation of these antigens through addition of a stretch of histidine residues at one end of the antigen.
  • compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention can comprise additional copies of antigens, or additional heterologous polypeptides from Mycobacterium sp., such as MTB8.4 antigen, MTB9.8 antigen, MTB9.9 antigen, MTB40 antigen, MTB41 antigen, 38-1, TbRa3, 38 kD, DPEP, TbH4, DPPD, ESAT-6 antigen, MTB85 complex antigen (e.g., MTB85b), or ⁇ -crystalline antigen, and Erd14.
  • the compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention can also comprise additional heterologous polypeptides from other non- Mycobacterium sources.
  • compositions and fusion proteins of the invention can include polypeptides or nucleic acids encoding polypeptides, wherein the polypeptide enhances expression of the antigen, e.g., NS1, an influenza virus protein, or an immunogenic portion thereof (see, e.g. WO99/40188 and WO93/04175).
  • the nucleic acids of the invention can be engineered based on codon preference in a species of choice, e.g., humans.
  • compositions of the invention can be naked DNA, or the compositions, e.g., polypeptides can also comprise adjuvants, e.g., MPL, 3D-MPL, IFA, AS adjuvants such as AS2, AS2′, AS2′′, AS4, AS6, ENHANZYN (Detox), QS21, CWS, TDM, AGP, CPG, Leif, saponin, and saponin mimetics, and derivatives thereof.
  • the compositions of the invention can comprise BCG or Pvac as an adjuvant.
  • compositions and fusion proteins of the invention are composed of at least two antigens selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a MTB32A antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • the antigens are selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a polypeptide comprising at least 205 amino acids of the N-terminus of a MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • the antigens are selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, a polypeptide comprising at least about 205 amino acids of the N-terminus of a MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a polypeptide comprising at least about 132 amino acids from the C-terminus of MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • Ra35 refers to the N-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 195 to 205 amino acids of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, or the corresponding region from another Mycobacterium species.
  • Ra12 refers to the C-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about the last 132 amino acids from MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, or the corresponding region from another Mycobacterium species.
  • compositions and fusion proteins of the invention The following provides sequences of some antigens used in the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention:
  • SEQ ID NO:1-4 MTB32A (Ra35FL or Ra35 mature), the sequence of which is also disclosed as SEQ ID NO:17 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:79 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 08/523,436, 08/523,435, Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112, Ser. No. 09/056,556, and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications, see also Skeiky et al., Infection and Immunity 67:3998-4007 (1999).
  • MTB32A also includes MTB32A amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad (His, Asp, Ser), e.g., the serine residue at amino acid position 207 in SEQ ID NO:2 or amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID NO:4, has been changed to another amino acid (e.g., alanine, Ra35FLMutSA, see, e.g., FIG. 6 and SEQ ID NO:6).
  • His, Asp, Ser the serine residue at amino acid position 207 in SEQ ID NO:2 or amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID NO:4
  • another amino acid e.g., alanine, Ra35FLMutSA, see, e.g., FIG. 6 and SEQ ID NO:6.
  • SEQ ID NO:5 and 6 Ra35FLMut SA, the mature version of RA35FL in which the serine residue at amino acid position 183 of SEQ ID NO:4 has been changed to an alanine residue.
  • SEQ ID NO:7 and 8 Ra35, the N-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 195 amino acids from the N-terminus of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, the nucleotide and amino acid sequence of which is disclosed in FIG. 4 (see also amino acids 33-227 of SEQ ID NO:2 and amino acids 8 to 202 of SEQ ID NO:4).
  • the term Ra35 (N-term) also includes Ra35 amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad (i.e., His, Asp, or Ser) has been changed as described above.
  • SEQ ID NO:9 and 10 MTBRa12, the C-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 132 amino acids from the C-terminus of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis (see, e.g., amino acids 224 to 355 of SEQ ID NO:2 and amino acids 199 to 330 of SEQ ID NO:4), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:4 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:66 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967.
  • SEQ ID NO:11, 12, 13, and 14 MTB39 (TbH9), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:106 (cDNA full length) and SEQ ID NO:107 (protein full length) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112, and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • the sequence is also disclosed as SEQ ID NO:33 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:91 (amino acid) in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/056,559.
  • MTB72F Ra12-TbH9-Ra35
  • SEQ ID NO:1 DNA
  • SEQ ID NO:2 protein
  • MTB372F also includes MTB72F amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad in Ra35FL (i.e., His, Asp, or Ser), has been changed as described above (see, e.g., MTB72FMutSA, FIG. 5 ).
  • SEQ ID NO:17 and 18 MTB72FMutSA (Ra12-TbH9-Ra35MutSA), wherein, in the Ra35 component of the fusion protein, the serine at position 710 has been changed to an alanine.
  • SEQ ID NO:19 and 20 TbH9-Ra35 (MTB59F), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:23 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:24 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • compositions and fusion proteins of the invention The following provides sequences of some additional antigens used in the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention:
  • SEQ ID NO: 21 and 22 MTB8.4 (DPV), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:101 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:102 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112 and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:23 and 24 MTB9.8 (MSL), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:12 (DNA), SEQ ID NO:109 (predicted amino acid sequence) and SEQ ID NO:110 to 124 (peptides) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/859,381, Ser. No. 08/858,998, Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • MTB9.9A MTB9.9A
  • MTI also known as MTI-A
  • SEQ ID NO:3 and SEQ ID NO:4 DNA
  • SEQ ID NO:29 and SEQ ID NO:51 to 66 ORF peptide for MTI
  • Ser. No. 08/859,381, Ser. No. 08/858,998, Ser. No. 09/073,009 and v09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • Two other MTI variants also exist, called MTI-B and MTI-C.
  • SEQ ID NO:28 and 29 MTB40 (HTCC#1), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:137 (cDNA) and 138 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:30 and 31 MTB41 (MTCC#2), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:140 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:142 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • ESAT-6 the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:103 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:104 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967.
  • the sequence of ESAT-6 is also disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,955,077.
  • SEQ ID NO:34 and 35 Tb38-1 or 38-1 (MTb11), the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:46 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:88 (predicted amino acid) in the U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 09/072,96; 08/523,436; 08/523,435; 08/818,112; and 08/818,111; and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:36 and 37 TbRa3, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:15 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:77 (predicted amino acid sequence) of WO 97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:38 and 39: 38 kD the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:154 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:155 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967. 38 kD has two alternative forms, with and without the N-terminal cysteine residue.
  • SEQ ID NO:40 and 41 DPEP, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:52 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:53 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 publications.
  • SEQ ID NO:42 and 43 TbH4, the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:43 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:81 (predicted amino acid sequence) in WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 publications.
  • SEQ ID NO:44 and 45 DPPD, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:240 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:241 (predicted amino acid sequence) in U.S. Ser. No. 09/072,967 and in the PCT/US99/03268 and PCT/US99/03265 applications.
  • the secreted form of DPPD is shown herein in FIG. 12 of PCT/US00/28095.
  • MTb82 (MTb867), the sequence of which is disclosed in FIGS. 8 (DNA) and 9 (amino acid) of PCT/US00/2809.
  • 85 complex antigen e.g., 85b antigen, the sequence of which is disclosed in Content et al., Infect. & Immunol. 59:3205-3212 (1991).
  • SEQ ID NO:46 and 47 DPV-MTI-MSL-MTCC#2 (MTb71F), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:15 (nucleic acid) and in SEQ ID NO:16: (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • SEQ ID NO:48 and 49 DPV-MTI-MSL (MTb31F), the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:18 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:19 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • the antigens described herein include polymorphic variants and conservatively modified variations, as well as inter-strain and interspecies Mycobacterium homologs.
  • the antigens described herein include subsequences or truncated sequences.
  • the fusion proteins may also contain additional polypeptides, optionally heterologous peptides from Mycobacterium or other sources. These antigens may be modified, for example, by adding linker peptide sequences as described below. These linker peptides may be inserted between one or more polypeptides which make up each of the fusion proteins.
  • Fusion polypeptide refers to a protein having at least two heterologous Mycobacterium sp. polypeptides covalently linked, either directly or via an amino acid linker.
  • the polypeptides forming the fusion protein are typically linked C— terminus to N-terminus, although they can also be linked C-terminus to C-terminus, N— terminus to N-terminus, or N-terminus to C-terminus.
  • the polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order. This term also refers to conservatively modified variants, polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, subsequences, interspecies homologs, and immunogenic fragments of the antigens that make up the fusion protein.
  • Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens are described in Cole et al., Nature 393:537 (1998), which discloses the entire Mycobacterium tuberculosis genome. The complete sequence of Mycobacterium tuberculosis can also be found at http://www.sanger.ac.uk and at http://www.pasteur.fr/mycdb/(MycDB).
  • Antigens from other Mycobacterium species that correspond to M. tuberculosis antigens can be identified, e.g., using sequence comparison algorithms, as described herein, or other methods known to those of skill in the art, e.g., hybridization assays and antibody binding assays. Fusion proteins of the invention can also comprise additional copies of a component antigen or immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • a polynucleotide sequence comprising a fusion protein of the invention hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least two nucleotide sequences, each encoding an antigen polypeptide selected from the group consisting of MTB39 or an immunogenic fragment thereof and MTB32A or an immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • the polynucleotide sequences encoding the individual antigens of the fusion polypeptide therefore include conservatively modified variants, polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, subsequences, immunogenic fragments, and interspecies homologs of MTB39 and MTB32A.
  • the polynucleotide sequence encoding the individual polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order.
  • the individual polypeptides of the fusion protein are in order (N— to C— terminus) from large to small.
  • Large antigens are approximately 30 to 150 kD in size
  • medium antigens are approximately 10 to 30 kD in size
  • small antigens are approximately less than 10 kD in size.
  • the sequence encoding the individual polypeptide may be as small as, e.g., an immunogenic fragment such as an individual CTL epitope encoding about 8 to 9 amino acids, or, e.g., an HTL or B cell epitope.
  • the fragment may also include multiple epitopes.
  • the immunogenic fragment may also represent a larger part of the antigen sequence, e.g., about 50% or more of MTB39 and MTB32A, e.g., the N— and C-terminal portions of MTB32A.
  • Preferred immunogenic fragments of MTB32A include Ra12, Ra35, and Ra35 MutSA.
  • a fusion polypeptide of the invention specifically binds to antibodies raised against at least two antigen polypeptides, wherein each antigen polypeptide is selected from the group consisting of MTB39 or an immunogenic portion or fragment thereof and MTB32A or an immunogenic portion thereof.
  • the antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal.
  • the fusion polypeptide specifically binds to antibodies raised against the fusion junction of the antigens, which antibodies do not bind to the antigens individually, i.e., when they are not part of a fusion protein.
  • the fusion polypeptides optionally comprise additional polypeptides, e.g., three, four, five, six, or more polypeptides, up to about 25 polypeptides, optionally heterologous polypeptides or repeated homologous polypeptides, fused to the at least two heterologous antigens.
  • the additional polypeptides of the fusion protein are optionally derived from Mycobacterium as well as other sources, such as other bacterial, viral, or invertebrate, vertebrate, or mammalian sources.
  • the individual polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order.
  • the fusion protein can also be linked to other molecules, including additional polypeptides.
  • the compositions of the invention can also comprise additional polypeptides that are unlinked to the fusion proteins of the invention. These additional polypeptides may be heterologous or homologous polypeptides.
  • fused refers to the covalent linkage between two polypeptides in a fusion protein.
  • the polypeptides are typically joined via a peptide bond, either directly to each other or via an amino acid linker.
  • the peptides can be joined via non-peptide covalent linkages known to those of skill in the art.
  • FL refers to full-length, i.e., a polypeptide that is the same length as the wild-type polypeptide.
  • immunogenic fragment thereof refers to a polypeptide comprising an epitope that is recognized by cytotoxic T lymphocytes, helper T lymphocytes or B cells.
  • Preferred immunogenic fragments of, e.g., MTB32A, are RA35, Ra35MutSA, or Ra12.
  • Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex includes those species traditionally considered as causing the disease tuberculosis, as well as Mycobacterium environmental and opportunistic species that cause tuberculosis and lung disease in immune compromised patients, such as patients with AIDS, e.g., M. tuberculosis, M. bovis, or M. africanum, BCG, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. celatum, M. genavense, M. haemophilum, M. kansasii, M. simiae, M. vaccae, M. fortuitum, and M. scrofulaceum (see, e.g., Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14 th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998).
  • An adjuvant refers to the components in a vaccine or therapeutic composition that increase the specific immune response to the antigen (see, e.g., Edelman, AIDS Res. Hum Retroviruses 8:1409-1411 (1992)).
  • Adjuvants induce immune responses of the Th1-type and Th-2 type response.
  • Th1-type cytokines e.g., IFN- ⁇ , IL-2, and IL-12
  • Th-2 type cytokines e.g., IL-4, IL-5, II-6, IL-10 and TNF- ⁇
  • Nucleic acid refers to deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form.
  • the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known nucleotide analogs or modified backbone residues or linkages, which are synthetic, naturally occurring, and non-naturally occurring, which have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid, and which are metabolized in a manner similar to the reference nucleotides. Examples of such analogs include, without limitation, phosphorothioates, phosphoramidates, methyl phosphonates, chiral-methyl phosphonates, 2-O-methyl ribonucleotides, peptide-nucleic acids (PNAs).
  • PNAs peptide-nucleic acids
  • nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, mRNA, oligonucleotide, and polynucleotide.
  • polypeptide “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues.
  • the terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non-naturally occurring amino acid polymer.
  • amino acid refers to naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids.
  • Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, ⁇ -carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine.
  • Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an a carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid.
  • Amino acid mimetics refers to chemical compounds that have a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
  • Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
  • “Conservatively modified variants” applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, conservatively modified variants refers to those nucleic acids which encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For instance, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide.
  • nucleic acid variations are “silent variations,” which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein which encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid.
  • each codon in a nucleic acid except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan
  • TGG which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan
  • amino acid sequences one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a “conservatively modified variant” where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
  • heterologous when used with reference to portions of a nucleic acid indicates that the nucleic acid comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature.
  • the nucleic acid is typically recombinantly produced, having two or more sequences from unrelated genes arranged to make a new functional nucleic acid, e.g., a promoter from one source and a coding region from another source.
  • a heterologous protein indicates that the protein comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature (e.g., a fusion protein).
  • the phrase “selectively (or specifically) hybridizes to” refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent hybridization conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular or library DNA or RNA).
  • stringent hybridization conditions refers to conditions under which a probe will hybridize to its target subsequence, typically in a complex mixture of nucleic acid, but to no other sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures. An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen, Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology—Hybridization with Nucleic Probes, “Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid assays” (1993). Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10° C. lower than the thermal melting point (T m ) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH.
  • T m thermal melting point
  • the T m is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH, and nucleic concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at T m , 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium).
  • Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1.0 M sodium ion, typically about 0.01 to 1.0 M sodium ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7.0 to 8.3 and the temperature is at least about 30° C. for short probes (e.g., 10 to 50 nucleotides) and at least about 60° C. for long probes (e.g., greater than 50 nucleotides).
  • Stringent conditions may also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide.
  • destabilizing agents such as formamide.
  • a positive signal is at least two times background, optionally 10 times background hybridization.
  • Exemplary stringent hybridization conditions can be as following: 50% formamide, 5 ⁇ SSC, and 1% SDS, incubating at 42° C., or, 5 ⁇ SSC, 1% SDS, incubating at 65° C., with wash in 0.2 ⁇ SSC, and 0.1% SDS at 65° C.
  • Nucleic acids that do not hybridize to each other under stringent conditions are still substantially identical if the polypeptides which they encode are substantially identical. This occurs, for example, when a copy of a nucleic acid is created using the maximum codon degeneracy permitted by the genetic code. In such cases, the nucleic acids typically hybridize under moderately stringent hybridization conditions.
  • Exemplary “moderately stringent hybridization conditions” include a hybridization in a buffer of 40% formamide, 1 M NaCl, 1% SDS at 37° C., and a wash in 1 ⁇ SSC at 45° C. A positive hybridization is at least twice background. Those of ordinary skill will readily recognize that alternative hybridization and wash conditions can be utilized to provide conditions of similar stringency.
  • Antibody refers to a polypeptide comprising a framework region from an immunoglobulin gene or fragments thereof that specifically binds and recognizes an antigen.
  • the recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon, and mu constant region genes, as well as the myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes.
  • Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda.
  • Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively.
  • An exemplary immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit comprises a tetramer.
  • Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kDa) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kDa).
  • the N— terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition.
  • the terms variable light chain (V L ) and variable heavy chain (V H ) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
  • Antibodies exist, e.g., as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well-characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases.
  • pepsin digests an antibody below the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′ 2 , a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to V H —C H 1 by a disulfide bond.
  • the F(ab)′ 2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region, thereby converting the F(ab)′ 2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer.
  • the Fab′ monomer is essentially Fab with part of the hinge region (see Fundamental Immunology (Paul ed., 3d ed.
  • antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically or by using recombinant DNA methodology.
  • the term antibody also includes antibody fragments either produced by the modification of whole antibodies, or those synthesized de novo using recombinant DNA methodologies (e.g., single chain Fv) or those identified using phage display libraries (see, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554 (1990)).
  • any technique known in the art can be used (see, e.g., Kohler & Milstein, Nature 256:495-497 (1975); Kozbor et al., Immunology Today 4: 72 (1983); Cole et al., pp. 77-96 in Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy (1985)).
  • Techniques for the production of single chain antibodies can be adapted to produce antibodies to polypeptides of this invention.
  • transgenic mice, or other organisms such as other mammals may be used to express humanized antibodies.
  • phage display technology can be used to identify antibodies and heteromeric Fab fragments that specifically bind to selected antigens (see, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554 (1990); Marks et al., Biotechnology 10:779-783 (1992)).
  • the specified antibodies bind to a particular protein at least two times the background and do not substantially bind in a significant amount to other proteins present in the sample.
  • Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody that is selected for its specificity for a particular protein.
  • polyclonal antibodies raised to fusion proteins can be selected to obtain only those polyclonal antibodies that are specifically immunoreactive with fusion protein and not with individual components of the fusion proteins.
  • This selection may be achieved by subtracting out antibodies that cross-react with the individual antigens.
  • a variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a particular protein.
  • solid-phase ELISA immunoassays are routinely used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a protein (see, e.g., Harlow & Lane, Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual (1988), for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity).
  • a specific or selective reaction will be at least twice background signal or noise and more typically more than 10 to 100 times background.
  • Polynucleotides may comprise a native sequence (i.e., an endogenous sequence that encodes an individual antigen or a portion thereof) or may comprise a variant of such a sequence.
  • Polynucleotide variants may contain one or more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions such that the biological activity of the encoded fusion polypeptide is not diminished, relative to a fusion polypeptide comprising native antigens.
  • Variants preferably exhibit at least about 70% identity, more preferably at least about 80% identity and most preferably at least about 90% identity to a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a native polypeptide or a portion thereof.
  • nucleic acids or polypeptide sequences refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that are the same or have a specified percentage of amino acid residues or nucleotides that are the same (i.e., 70% identity, optionally 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, er 95% identity over a specified region), when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window, or designated region as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by manual alignment and visual inspection. Such sequences are then said to be “substantially identical.” This definition also refers to the compliment of a test sequence.
  • the identity exists over a region that is at least about 25 to about 50 amino acids or nucleotides in length, or optionally over a region that is 75-100 amino acids or nucleotides in length.
  • sequence comparison typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence, to which test sequences are compared.
  • test and reference sequences are entered into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. Default program parameters can be used, or alternative parameters can be designated.
  • sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identities for the test sequences relative to the reference sequence, based on the program parameters.
  • a “comparison window”, as used herein, includes reference to a segment of any one of the number of contiguous positions selected from the group consisting of from 25 to 500, usually about 50 to about 200, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
  • Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison are well-known in the art. Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol.
  • PILEUP creates a multiple sequence alignment from a group of related sequences using progressive, pairwise alignments to show relationship and percent sequence identity. It also plots a tree or dendogram showing the clustering relationships used to create the alignment. PILEUP uses a simplification of the progressive alignment method of Feng & Doolittle, J. Mol. Evol. 35:351-360 (1987). The method used is similar to the method described by Higgins & Sharp, CABIOS 5:151-153 (1989). The program can align up to 300 sequences, each of a maximum length of 5,000 nucleotides or amino acids. The multiple alignment procedure begins with the pairwise alignment of the two most similar sequences, producing a cluster of two aligned sequences.
  • This cluster is then aligned to the next most related sequence or cluster of aligned sequences.
  • Two clusters of sequences are aligned by a simple extension of the pairwise alignment of two individual sequences.
  • the final alignment is achieved by a series of progressive, pairwise alignments.
  • the program is run by designating specific sequences and their amino acid or nucleotide coordinates for regions of sequence comparison and by designating the program parameters.
  • PILEUP a reference sequence is compared to other test sequences to determine the percent sequence identity relationship using the following parameters: default gap weight (3.00), default gap length weight (0.10), and weighted end gaps.
  • PILEUP can be obtained from the GCG sequence analysis software package, e.g., version 7.0 (Devereaux et al., Nuc. Acids Res. 12:387-395 (1984).
  • BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms are described in Altschul et al., Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 (1977) and Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990), respectively.
  • Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/).
  • HSPs high scoring sequence pairs
  • T is referred to as the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al., supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always>0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always ⁇ 0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score.
  • Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached.
  • the BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment.
  • the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin & Altschul, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787 (1993)).
  • One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance.
  • P(N) the smallest sum probability
  • a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.2, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
  • DNA segment and “polynucleotide” refer to a DNA molecule that has been isolated free of total genomic DNA of a particular species. Therefore, a DNA segment encoding a polypeptide refers to a DNA segment that contains one or more coding sequences yet is substantially isolated away from, or purified free from, total genomic DNA of the species from which the DNA segment is obtained. Included within the terms “DNA segment” and “polynucleotide” are DNA segments and smaller fragments of such segments, and also recombinant vectors, including, for example, plasmids, cosmids, phagemids, phage, viruses, and the like.
  • DNA segments of this invention can include genomic sequences, extra-genomic and plasmid-encoded sequences and smaller engineered gene segments that express, or may be adapted to express, proteins, polypeptides, peptides and the like. Such segments may be naturally isolated, or modified synthetically by the hand of man.
  • isolated refers to material that is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany it as found in its native state. Of course, this refers to the DNA segment as originally isolated, and does not exclude other isolated proteins, genes, or coding regions later added to the composition by the hand of man. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. An isolated nucleic acid is separated from other open reading frames that flank the gene and encode proteins other than the gene.
  • polynucleotides may be single-stranded (coding or antisense) or double-stranded, and may be DNA (genomic, cDNA or synthetic) or RNA molecules.
  • RNA molecules include HnRNA molecules, which contain introns and correspond to a DNA molecule in a one-to-one manner, and mRNA molecules, which do not contain introns. Additional coding or non-coding sequences may, but need not, be present within a polynucleotide of the present invention, and a polynucleotide may, but need not, be linked to other molecules and/or support materials.
  • Polynucleotides may comprise a native sequence (i.e., an endogenous sequence that encodes a Mycobacterium antigen or a portion thereof) or may comprise a variant, or a biological or antigenic functional equivalent of such a sequence.
  • Polynucleotide variants may contain one or more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions, as further described below, preferably such that the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide is not diminished, relative to a native tumor protein. The effect on the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide may generally be assessed as described herein.
  • variants also encompasses homologous genes of xenogenic origin.
  • the present invention provides isolated polynucleotides and polypeptides comprising various lengths of contiguous stretches of sequence identical to or complementary to one or more of the sequences disclosed herein.
  • polynucleotides are provided by this invention that comprise at least about 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500 or 1000 or more contiguous nucleotides of one or more of the sequences disclosed herein as well as all intermediate lengths there between.
  • intermediate lengths means any length between the quoted values, such as 16, 17, 18, 19, etc.; 21, 22, 23, etc.; 30, 31, 32, etc.; 50, 51, 52, 53, etc.; 100, 101, 102, 103, etc.;150, 151, 152, 153, etc.; including all integers through 200-500; 500-1,000, and the like.
  • polynucleotides of the present invention may be combined with other DNA sequences, such as promoters, polyadenylation signals, additional restriction enzyme sites, multiple cloning sites, other coding segments, and the like, such that their overall length may vary considerably. It is therefore contemplated that a nucleic acid fragment of almost any length may be employed, with the total length preferably being limited by the ease of preparation and use in the intended recombinant DNA protocol.
  • illustrative DNA segments with total lengths of about 10,000, about 5000, about 3000, about 2,000, about 1,000, about 500, about 200, about 100, about 50 base pairs in length, and the like, (including all intermediate lengths) are contemplated to be useful in many implementations of this invention.
  • nucleotide sequences that encode a polypeptide as described herein. Some of these polynucleotides bear minimal homology to the nucleotide sequence of any native gene. Nonetheless, polynucleotides that vary due to differences in codon usage are specifically contemplated by the present invention, for example polynucleotides that are optimized for human and/or primate codon selection. Further, alleles of the genes comprising the polynucleotide sequences provided herein are within the scope of the present invention.
  • Alleles are endogenous genes that are altered as a result of one or more mutations, such as deletions, additions and/or substitutions of nucleotides.
  • the resulting mRNA and protein may, but need not, have an altered structure or function. Alleles may be identified using standard techniques (such as hybridization, amplification and/or database sequence comparison).
  • Polynucleotides may be identified, prepared and/or manipulated using any of a variety of well established techniques.
  • a polynucleotide may be identified, as described in more detail below, by screening a microarray of cDNAs for tumor-associated expression (i.e., expression that is at least two fold greater in a tumor than in normal tissue, as determined using a representative assay provided herein). Such screens may be performed, for example, using a Synteni microarray (Palo Alto, Calif.) according to the manufacturer's instructions (and essentially as described by Schena et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:10614-10619 (1996) and Heller et al., Proc. Natl.
  • polynucleotides may be amplified from cDNA prepared from cells expressing the proteins described herein, such as M. tuberculosis cells. Such polynucleotides may be amplified via polymerase chain reaction (PCR). For this approach, sequence-specific primers may be designed based on the sequences provided herein, and may be purchased or synthesized.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • An amplified portion of a polynucleotide of the present invention may be used to isolate a full length gene from a suitable library (e.g., a M. tuberculosis cDNA library) using well known techniques.
  • a library cDNA or genomic
  • a library is screened using one or more polynucleotide probes or primers suitable for amplification.
  • a library is size-selected to include larger molecules. Random primed libraries may also be preferred for identifying 5′ and upstream regions of genes. Genomic libraries are preferred for obtaining introns and extending 5′ sequences.
  • a partial sequence may be labeled (e.g., by nick-translation or end-labeling with 32 p) using well known techniques.
  • a bacterial or bacteriophage library is then generally screened by hybridizing filters containing denatured bacterial colonies (or lawns containing phage plaques) with the labeled probe (see Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (1989)).
  • Hybridizing colonies or plaques are selected and expanded, and the DNA is isolated for further analysis.
  • cDNA clones may be analyzed to determine the amount of additional sequence by, for example, PCR using a primer from the partial sequence and a primer from the vector.
  • Restriction maps and partial sequences may be generated to identify one or more overlapping clones.
  • the complete sequence may then be determined using standard techniques, which may involve generating a series of deletion clones.
  • the resulting overlapping sequences can then assembled into a single contiguous sequence.
  • a full length cDNA molecule can be generated by ligating suitable fragments, using well known techniques.
  • amplification techniques for obtaining a full length coding sequence from a partial cDNA sequence.
  • amplification is generally performed via PCR. Any of a variety of commercially available kits may be used to perform the amplification step.
  • Primers may be designed using, for example, software well known in the art. Primers are preferably 22-30 nucleotides in length, have a GC content of at least 50% and anneal to the target sequence at temperatures of about 68° C. to 72° C.
  • the amplified region may be sequenced as described above, and overlapping sequences assembled into a contiguous sequence.
  • amplification technique is inverse PCR (see Triglia et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16:8186 (1988)), which uses restriction enzymes to generate a fragment in the known region of the gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a template for PCR with divergent primers derived from the known region.
  • sequences adjacent to a partial sequence may be retrieved by amplification with a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to a known region. The amplified sequences are typically subjected to a second round of amplification with the same linker primer and a second primer specific to the known region.
  • RACE Rapid amplification of cDNA ends
  • RACE rapid amplification of cDNA ends
  • This technique involves the use of an internal primer and an external primer, which hybridizes to a polyA region or vector sequence, to identify sequences that are 5′ and 3′ of a known sequence. Additional techniques include capture PCR (Lagerstrom et al., PCR Methods Applic. 1:11 1-19 (1991)) and walking PCR (Parker et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 19:3055-60 (1991)). Other methods employing amplification may also be employed to obtain a full length cDNA sequence.
  • EST expressed sequence tag
  • Searches for overlapping ESTs may generally be performed using well known programs (e.g., NCBI BLAST searches), and such ESTs may be used to generate a contiguous full length sequence.
  • Full length DNA sequences may also be obtained by analysis of genomic fragments.
  • polynucleotide sequences or fragments thereof which encode polypeptides of the invention, or fusion proteins or functional equivalents thereof may be used in recombinant DNA molecules to direct expression of a polypeptide in appropriate host cells. Due to the inherent degeneracy of the genetic code, other DNA sequences that encode substantially the same or a functionally equivalent amino acid sequence may be produced and these sequences may be used to clone and express a given polypeptide.
  • codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce a recombinant RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
  • polynucleotide sequences of the present invention can be engineered using methods generally known in the art in order to alter polypeptide encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the gene product.
  • DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides may be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences.
  • site-directed mutagenesis may be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, or introduce mutations, and so forth.
  • natural, modified, or recombinant nucleic acid sequences may be ligated to a heterologous sequence to encode a fusion protein.
  • a heterologous sequence to encode a fusion protein.
  • a fusion protein may also be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the polypeptide may be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
  • Sequences encoding a desired polypeptide may be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers, M. H. et al., Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. pp. 215-223 (1980), Horn et al., Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. pp. 225-232 (1980)).
  • the protein itself may be produced using chemical methods to synthesize the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or a portion thereof.
  • peptide synthesis can be performed using various solid-phase techniques (Roberge et al., Science 269:202-204 (1995)) and automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using the ABI 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer, Palo Alto, Calif.).
  • a newly synthesized peptide may be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, Proteins, Structures and Molecular Principles (1983)) or other comparable techniques available in the art.
  • the composition of the synthetic peptides may be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure). Additionally, the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or any part thereof, may be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins, or any part thereof, to produce a variant polypeptide.
  • the nucleotide sequences encoding the polypeptide, or functional equivalents may be inserted into appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence.
  • appropriate expression vector i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence.
  • Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art may be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (1989), and Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (1989).
  • a variety of expression vector/host systems may be utilized to contain and express polynucleotide sequences. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors; insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus); plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids); or animal cell systems.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors
  • yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus)
  • plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic
  • control elements or “regulatory sequences” present in an expression vector are those non-translated regions of the vector—enhancers, promoters, 5′ and 3′ untranslated regions—which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements may vary in their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, may be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the PBLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) or PSPORT1 plasmid (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) and the like may be used.
  • inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the PBLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) or PSPORT1 plasmid (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.)
  • promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are generally preferred. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of the sequence encoding a polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV may be advantageously used with an appropriate selectable marker.
  • a number of expression vectors may be selected depending upon the use intended for the expressed polypeptide. For example, when large quantities are needed, for example for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be used.
  • Such vectors include, but are not limited to, the multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the sequence encoding the polypeptide of interest may be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of ⁇ -galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; pIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem.
  • pGEX Vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST).
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • Proteins made in such systems may be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor XA protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.
  • yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae
  • a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH may be used.
  • constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH
  • sequences encoding polypeptides may be driven by any of a number of promoters.
  • viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV may be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu, EMBO J. 3:1671-1680 (1984); Broglie et al., Science 224:838-843 (1984); and Winter et al., Results Probl. Cell Differ. 17:85-105 (1991)).
  • constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or pathogen-mediated transfection. Such techniques are described in a number of generally available reviews (see, e.g., Hobbs in McGraw Hill Yearbook of Science and Technology pp. 191-196 (1992)).
  • An insect system may also be used to express a polypeptide of interest.
  • Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae.
  • the sequences encoding the polypeptide may be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of the polypeptide-encoding sequence will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein.
  • the recombinant viruses may then be used to infect, for example, S.
  • a number of viral-based expression systems are generally available.
  • sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest may be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential E1 or E3 region of the viral genome may be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing the polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:3655-3659 (1984)).
  • transcription enhancers such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, may be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
  • RSV Rous sarcoma virus
  • Specific initiation signals may also be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding the polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a portion thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals including the ATG initiation codon should be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon should be in the correct reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons may be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used, such as those described in the literature (Scharf. et al., Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20:125-162 (1994)).
  • a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion.
  • modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not-limited to, acetylation, carboxylation. glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation.
  • Post-translational processing which cleaves a “prepro” form of the protein may also be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function.
  • Different host cells such as CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and W138, which have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational activities, may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein.
  • cell lines which stably express a polynucleotide of interest may be transformed using expression vectors which may contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media before they are switched to selective media.
  • the purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells which successfully express the introduced sequences.
  • Resistant clones of stably transformed cells may be proliferated using tissue culture techniques appropriate to the cell type.
  • any number of selection systems may be used to recover transformed cell lines. These include, but are not limited to, the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11:223-32 (1977)) and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817-23 (1990)) genes which can be employed in tk.sup.- or aprt.sup.-cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection; for example, dhfr which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • npt which confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al., J. Mol. Biol. 150:1-14 (1981)); and als or pat, which confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murry, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described, for example, trpB, which allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • marker gene expression suggests that the gene of interest is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed.
  • sequence encoding a polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, recombinant cells containing sequences can be identified by the absence of marker gene function.
  • a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a polypeptide-encoding sequence under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the tandem gene as well.
  • host cells which contain and express a desired polynucleotide sequence may be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques which include membrane, solution, or chip based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein.
  • a variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of polynucleotide-encoded products, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the product are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • a two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay utilizing monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a given polypeptide may be preferred for some applications, but a competitive binding assay may also be employed. These and other assays are described, among other places, in Hampton et al., Serological Methods, a Laboratory Manual (1990) and Maddox et al., J. Exp. Med. 158:1211-1216 (1983).
  • Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide.
  • the sequences, or any portions thereof may be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe.
  • Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and may be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6 and labeled nucleotides.
  • reporter molecules or labels include radionuclides, enzymes, fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
  • Host cells transformed with a polynucleotide sequence of interest may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture.
  • the protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used:
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides of the invention may be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of the encoded polypeptide through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane.
  • Other recombinant constructions may be used to join sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest to nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will facilitate purification of soluble proteins.
  • Such purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system (Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.).
  • metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals
  • protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin
  • the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.
  • cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor XA or enterokinase (Invitrogen. San Diego, Calif.) between the purification domain and the encoded polypeptide may be used to facilitate purification.
  • One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a polypeptide of interest and a nucleic acid encoding 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site.
  • the histidine residues facilitate purification on IMIAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography) as described in Porath et al., Prot. Exp. Purif. 3:263-281 (1992) while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the desired polypeptide from the fusion protein.
  • IMIAC immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography
  • polypeptides of the invention may be produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154 (1963)). Protein synthesis may be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Alternatively, various fragments may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical methods to produce the full length molecule.
  • genetic constructs comprising one or more of the polynucleotides of the invention are introduced into cells in vivo. This may be achieved using any of a variety or well known approaches, several of which are outlined below for the purpose of illustration.
  • adenovirus expression vector is meant to include those constructs containing adenovirus sequences sufficient to (a) support packaging of the construct and (b) to express a polynucleotide that has been cloned therein in a sense or antisense orientation.
  • expression does not require that the gene product be synthesized.
  • the expression vector comprises a genetically engineered form of an adenovirus.
  • retrovirus the adenoviral infection of host cells does not result in chromosomal integration because adenoviral DNA can replicate in an episomal manner without potential genotoxicity.
  • adenoviruses are structurally stable, and no genome rearrangement has been detected after extensive amplification. Adenovirus can infect virtually all epithelial cells regardless of their cell cycle stage. So far, adenoviral infection appears to be linked only to mild disease such as acute respiratory disease in humans.
  • Adenovirus is particularly suitable for use as a gene transfer vector because of its mid-sized genome, ease of manipulation, high titer, wide target-cell range and high infectivity. Both ends of the viral genome contain 100-200 base pair inverted repeats (ITRs), which are cis elements necessary for viral DNA replication and packaging.
  • ITRs inverted repeats
  • the early (E) and late (L) regions of the genome contain different transcription units that are divided by the onset of viral DNA replication.
  • the E1 region (E1A and E1B) encodes proteins responsible for the regulation of transcription of the viral genome and a few cellular genes.
  • the expression of the E2 region results in the synthesis of the proteins for viral DNA replication.
  • MLP major late promoter
  • TPL 5′-tripartite leader
  • recombinant adenovirus is generated from homologous recombination between shuttle vector and provirus vector. Due to the possible recombination between two proviral vectors, wild-type adenovirus may be generated from this process. Therefore, it is critical to isolate a single clone of virus from an individual plaque and examine its genomic structure.
  • adenovirus generation and propagation of the current adenovirus vectors, which are replication deficient, depend on a unique helper cell line, designated 293, which was transformed from human embryonic kidney cells by Ad5 DNA fragments and constitutively expresses E1 proteins (Graham et al., 1977). Since the E3 region is dispensable from the adenovirus genome (Jones & Shenk, 1978), the current adenovirus vectors, with the help of 293 cells, carry foreign DNA in either the E1, the D3 or both regions (Graham & Prevec, 1991). In nature, adenovirus can package approximately 105% of the wild-type genome (Ghosh-Choudhury et al., 1987), providing capacity for about 2 extra kB of DNA.
  • the maximum capacity of the current adenovirus vector is under 7.5 kB, or about 15% of the total length of the vector. More than 80% of the adenovirus viral genome remains in the vector backbone and is the source of vector-borne cytotoxicity. Also, the replication deficiency of the E1-deleted virus is incomplete. For example, leakage of viral gene expression has been observed with the currently available vectors at high multiplicities of infection (MOI) (Mulligan, 1993).
  • MOI multiplicities of infection
  • Helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells.
  • the helper cells may be derived from the cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for human adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g., Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells.
  • the currently preferred helper cell line is 293.
  • Racher et al. (1995) disclosed improved methods for culturing 293 cells and propagating adenovirus.
  • natural cell aggregates are grown by inoculating individual cells into 1 liter siliconized spinner flasks (Techne, Cambridge, UK) containing 100-200 ml of medium. Following stirring at 40 rpm, the cell viability is estimated with trypan blue.
  • Fibra-Cel microcarriers (Bibby Sterlin, Stone, UK) (5 g/l) is employed as follows.
  • the adenovirus may be of any of the 42 different known serotypes or subgroups A-F.
  • Adenovirus type 5 of subgroup C is the preferred starting material in order to obtain a conditional replication-defective adenovirus vector for use in the present invention, since Adenovirus type 5 is a human adenovirus about which a great deal of biochemical and genetic information is known, and it has historically been used for most constructions employing adenovirus as a vector.
  • the typical vector according to the present invention is replication defective and will not have an adenovirus E1 region.
  • the position of insertion of the construct within the adenovirus sequences is not critical to the invention.
  • the polynucleotide encoding the gene of interest may also be inserted in lieu of the deleted E3 region in E3 replacement vectors as described by Karlsson et al. (1986) or in the E4 region where a helper cell line or helper virus complements the E4 defect.
  • Adenovirus is easy to grow and manipulate and exhibits broad host range in vitro and in vivo. This group of viruses can be obtained in high titers, e.g., 10 9 -10 11 plaque-forming units per ml, and they are highly infective. The life cycle of adenovirus does not require integration into the host cell genome. The foreign genes delivered by adenovirus vectors are episomal and, therefore, have low genotoxicity to host cells. No side effects have been reported in studies of vaccination with wild-type adenovirus (Couch et al., 1963; Top et al., 1971), demonstrating their safety and therapeutic potential as in vivo gene transfer vectors.
  • Adenovirus vectors have been used in eukaryotic gene expression (Levrero et al., 1991; Gomez-Foix et al., 1992) and vaccine development (Grunhaus & Horwitz, 1992; Graham & Prevec, 1992). Recently, animal studies suggested that recombinant adenovirus could be used for gene therapy (Stratford-Perricaudet & Perricaudet, 1991; Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1990; Rich et al., 1993).
  • the retroviruses are a group of single-stranded RNA viruses characterized by an ability to convert their RNA to double-stranded DNA in infected cells by a process of reverse-transcription (Coffin, 1990).
  • the resulting DNA then stably integrates into cellular chromosomes as a provirus and directs synthesis of viral proteins.
  • the integration results in the retention of the viral gene sequences in the recipient cell and its descendants.
  • the retroviral genome contains three genes, gag, pol, and env that code for capsid proteins, polymerase enzyme, and envelope components, respectively.
  • a sequence found upstream from the gag gene contains a signal for packaging of the genome into virions.
  • Two long terminal repeat (LTR) sequences are present at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the viral genome. These contain strong promoter and enhancer sequences and are also required for integration in the host cell genome (Coffin, 1990).
  • a nucleic acid encoding one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of interest is inserted into the viral genome in the place of certain viral sequences to produce a virus that is replication-defective.
  • a packaging cell line containing the gag, pol, and env genes but without the LTR and packaging components is constructed (Mann et al., 1983).
  • Retroviral vectors are able to infect a broad variety of cell types. However, integration and stable expression require the division of host cells (Paskind et al., 1975).
  • AAV (Ridgeway, 1988; Hermonat & Muzycska, 1984) is a parovirus, discovered as a contamination of adenoviral stocks. It is a ubiquitous virus (antibodies are present in 85% of the US human population) that has not been linked to any disease. It is also classified as a dependovirus, because its replications is dependent on the presence of a helper virus, such as adenovirus. Five serotypes have been isolated, of which AAV-2 is the best characterized.
  • AAV has a single-stranded linear DNA that is encapsidated into capsid proteins VP1, VP2 and VP3 to form an icosahedral virion of 20 to 24 nm in diameter (Muzyczka & McLaughlin, 1988).
  • the AAV DNA is approximately 4.7 kilobases long. It contains two open reading frames and is flanked by two ITRs. There are two major genes in the AAV genome: rep and cap. The rep gene codes for proteins responsible for viral replications, whereas cap codes for capsid protein VP1-3. Each ITR forms a T-shaped hairpin structure. These terminal repeats are the only essential cis components of the AAV for chromosomal integration. Therefore, the AAV can be used as a vector with all viral coding sequences removed and replaced by the cassette of genes for delivery. Three viral promoters have been identified and named p5, p19, and p40, according to their map position. Transcription from p5 and p19 results in production of rep proteins, and transcription from p40 produces the capsid proteins (Hermonat & Muzyczka, 1984).
  • AAV is also a good choice of delivery vehicles due to its safety. There is a relatively complicated rescue mechanism: not only wild type adenovirus but also AAV genes are required to mobilize rAAV. Likewise, AAV is not pathogenic and not associated with any disease. The removal of viral coding sequences minimizes immune reactions to viral gene expression, and therefore, rAAV does not evoke an inflammatory response.
  • viral vectors may be employed as expression constructs in the present invention for the delivery of oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences to a host cell.
  • Vectors derived from viruses such as vaccinia virus (Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988), lentiviruses, polio viruses and herpes viruses may be employed. They offer several attractive features for various mammalian cells (Friedmann, 1989; Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988; Horwich et al., 1990).
  • the expression construct In order to effect expression of the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of the present invention, the expression construct must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cells lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the treatment of certain disease states. As described above, one preferred mechanism for delivery is via viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle.
  • the nucleic acid encoding the desired oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may be positioned and expressed at different sites.
  • the nucleic acid encoding the construct may be stably integrated into the genome of the cell. This integration may be in the specific location and orientation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non-specific location (gene augmentation).
  • the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or “episomes” encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle. How the expression construct is delivered to a cell and where in the cell the nucleic acid remains is dependent on the type of expression construct employed.
  • the expression construct comprising one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may simply consist of naked recombinant DNA or plasmids. Transfer of the construct may be performed by any of the methods mentioned above which physically or chemically permeabilize the cell membrane. This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo use as well. Dubensky et al. (1984) successfully injected polyomavirus DNA in the form of calcium phosphate precipitates into liver and spleen of adult and newborn mice demonstrating active viral replication and acute infection.
  • Benvenisty & Reshef (1986) also demonstrated that direct intraperitoneal injection of calcium phosphate-precipitated plasmids results in expression of the transfected genes. It is envisioned that DNA encoding a gene of interest may also be transferred in a similar manner in vivo and express the gene product.
  • Another embodiment of the invention for transferring a naked DNA expression construct into cells may involve particle bombardment. This method depends on the ability to accelerate DNA-coated microprojectiles to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them (Klein et al., 1987). Several devices for accelerating small particles have been developed. One such device relies on a high voltage discharge to generate an electrical current, which in turn provides the motive force (Yang et al., 1990). The microprojectiles used have consisted of biologically inert substances such as tungsten or gold beads.
  • Selected organs including the liver, skin, and muscle tissue of rats and mice have been bombarded in vivo (Yang et al., 1990; Zelenin et al., 1991). This may require surgical exposure of the tissue or cells, to eliminate any intervening tissue between the gun and the target organ, i.e., ex vivo treatment. Again, DNA encoding a particular gene may be delivered via this method and still be incorporated by the present invention.
  • a polypeptide of the invention will be an isolated polypeptide (or an epitope, variant, or active fragment thereof) derived from a mammalian species.
  • the polypeptide is encoded by a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein or a sequence which hybridizes under moderately stringent conditions to a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein.
  • the polypeptide may be defined as a polypeptide which comprises a contiguous amino acid sequence from an amino acid sequence disclosed herein, or which polypeptide comprises an entire amino acid sequence disclosed herein.
  • Immunogenic portions may generally be identified using well known techniques, such as those summarized in Paul, Fundamental Immunology, 3rd ed., 243-247 (1993) and references cited therein. Such techniques include screening polypeptides for the ability to react with antigen-specific antibodies, antisera and/or T-cell lines or clones.
  • antisera and antibodies are “antigen-specific” if they specifically bind to an antigen (i.e., they react with the protein in an ELISA or other immunoassay, and do not react detectably with unrelated proteins).
  • antisera and antibodies may be prepared as described herein, and using well known techniques.
  • polypeptide is a portion that reacts with such antisera and/or T-cells at a level that is not substantially less than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide (e.g., in an ELISA and/or T-cell reactivity assay).
  • immunogenic portions may react within such assays at a level that is similar to or greater than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide.
  • screens may generally be performed using methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as those described in Harlow & Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual (1988).
  • a polypeptide may be immobilized on a solid support and contacted with patient sera to allow binding of antibodies within the sera to the immobilized polypeptide. Unbound sera may then be removed and bound antibodies detected using, for example, 125 I-labeled Protein A.
  • Polypeptides may be prepared using any of a variety of well known techniques. Recombinant polypeptides encoded by DNA sequences as described above may be readily prepared from the DNA sequences using any of a variety of expression vectors known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Expression may be achieved in any appropriate host cell that has been transformed or transfected with an expression vector containing a DNA molecule that encodes a recombinant polypeptide. Suitable host cells include prokaryotes, yeast, and higher eukaryotic cells, such as mammalian cells and plant cells. Preferably, the host cells employed are E. coli , yeast or a mammalian cell line such as COS or CHO.
  • Supernatants from suitable host/vector systems which secrete recombinant protein or polypeptide into culture media may be first concentrated using a commercially available filter. Following concentration, the concentrate may be applied to a suitable purification matrix such as an affinity matrix or an ion exchange resin. Finally, one or more reverse phase HPLC steps can be employed to further purify a recombinant polypeptide.
  • a suitable purification matrix such as an affinity matrix or an ion exchange resin.
  • Polypeptides of the invention, immunogenic fragments thereof, and other variants having less than about 100 amino acids, and generally less than about 50 amino acids may also be generated by synthetic means, using techniques well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • such polypeptides may be synthesized using any of the commercially available solid-phase techniques, such as the Merrifield solid-phase synthesis method, where amino acids are sequentially added to a growing amino acid chain. See Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2146 (1963).
  • Equipment for automated synthesis of polypeptides is commercially available from suppliers such as Perkin Elmer/Applied BioSystems Division (Foster City, Calif.), and may be operated according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • a polypeptide may be a fusion protein that comprises multiple polypeptides as described herein, or that comprises at least one polypeptide as described herein and an unrelated sequence, such as a known tumor protein.
  • a fusion partner may, for example, assist in providing T helper epitopes (an immunological fusion partner), preferably T helper epitopes recognized by humans, or may assist in expressing the protein (an expression enhancer) at higher yields than the native recombinant protein.
  • Certain preferred fusion partners are both immunological and expression enhancing fusion partners.
  • Other fusion partners may be selected so as to increase the solubility of the protein or to enable the protein to be targeted to desired intracellular compartments.
  • Still further fusion partners include affinity tags, which facilitate purification of the protein.
  • Fusion proteins may generally be prepared using standard techniques, including chemical conjugation.
  • a fusion protein is expressed as a recombinant protein, allowing the production of increased levels, relative to a non-fused protein, in an expression system.
  • DNA sequences encoding the polypeptide components may be assembled separately, and ligated into an appropriate expression vector.
  • the 3′ end of the DNA sequence encoding one polypeptide component is ligated, with or without a peptide linker, to the 5′ end of a DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide component so that the reading frames of the sequences are in phase. This permits translation into a single fusion protein that retains the biological activity of both component polypeptides.
  • a peptide linker sequence may be employed to separate the first and second polypeptide components by a distance sufficient to ensure that each polypeptide folds into its secondary and tertiary structures.
  • Such a peptide linker sequence is incorporated into the fusion protein using standard techniques well known in the art.
  • Suitable peptide linker sequences may be chosen based on the following factors: (1) their ability to adopt a flexible extended conformation; (2) their inability to adopt a secondary structure that could interact with functional epitopes on the first and second polypeptides; and (3) the lack of hydrophobic or charged residues that might react with the polypeptide functional epitopes.
  • Preferred peptide linker sequences contain Gly, Asn and Ser residues.
  • linker sequences which may be usefully employed as linkers include those disclosed in Maratea et al., Gene 40:39-46 (1985); Murphy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:8258-8262 (1986); U.S. Pat. No. 4,935,233 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,751,180.
  • the linker sequence may generally be from 1 to about 50 amino acids in length. Linker sequences are not required when the first and second polypeptides have non-essential N-terminal amino acid regions that can be used to separate the functional domains and prevent steric interference.
  • the ligated DNA sequences are operably linked to suitable transcriptional or translational regulatory elements.
  • the regulatory elements responsible for expression of DNA are located only 5′ to the DNA sequence encoding the first polypeptides.
  • stop codons required to end translation and transcription termination signals are only present 3′ to the DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide.
  • Fusion proteins are also provided. Such proteins comprise a polypeptide as described herein together with an unrelated immunogenic protein. Preferably the immunogenic protein is capable of eliciting a recall response. Examples of such proteins include tetanus, tuberculosis and hepatitis proteins (see, e.g., Stoute et al., New Engl. J. Med. 336:86-91 (1997)).
  • an immunological fusion partner is derived from protein D, a surface protein of the gram-negative bacterium Haemophilus influenza B (WO 91/18926).
  • a protein D derivative comprises approximately the first third of the protein (e.g., the first N-terminal 100-110 amino acids), and a protein D derivative may be lipidated.
  • the first 109 residues of a lipoprotein D fusion partner is included on the N-terminus to provide the polypeptide with additional exogenous T-cell epitopes and to increase the expression level in E. coli (thus functioning as an expression enhancer).
  • the lipid tail ensures optimal presentation of the antigen to antigen presenting cells.
  • Other fusion partners include the non-structural protein from influenzae virus, NS1 (hemaglutinin). Typically, the N-terminal 81 amino acids are used, although different fragments that include T-helper epitopes may be used.
  • the immunological fusion partner is the protein known as LYTA, or a portion thereof (preferably a C-terminal portion);
  • LYTA is derived from Streptococcus pneumoniae, which synthesizes an N-acetyl-L-alanine amidase known as amidase LYTA (encoded by the LytA gene; Gene 43:265-292 (1986)).
  • LYTA is an autolysin that specifically degrades certain bonds in the peptidoglycan backbone.
  • the C-terminal domain of the LYTA protein is responsible for the affinity to the choline or to some choline analogues such as DEAE. This property has been exploited for the development of E.
  • coli C-LYTA expressing plasmids useful for expression of fusion proteins. Purification of hybrid proteins containing the C-LYTA fragment at the amino terminus has been described (see Biotechnology 10:795-798 (1992)). Within a preferred embodiment, a repeat portion of LYTA may be incorporated into a fusion protein. A repeat portion is found in the C-terminal region starting at residue 178. A particularly preferred repeat portion incorporates residues 188-305.
  • polypeptides including fusion proteins and polynucleotides as described herein are isolated.
  • An “isolated” polypeptide or polynucleotide is one that is removed from its original environment.
  • a naturally-occurring protein is isolated if it is separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in the natural system.
  • polypeptides are at least about 90% pure, more preferably at least about 95% pure and most preferably at least about 99% pure.
  • a polynucleotide is considered to be isolated if, for example, it is cloned into a vector that is not a part of the natural environment.
  • Immunotherapeutic compositions may also, or alternatively, comprise T cells specific for a Mycobacterium antigen.
  • T cells may generally be prepared in vitro or ex vivo, using standard procedures.
  • T cells may be isolated from bone marrow, peripheral blood, or a fraction of bone marrow or peripheral blood of a patient, using a commercially available cell separation system, such as the IsolexTM System, available from Nexell Therapeutics, Inc. (Irvine, Calif.; see also U.S. Pat. No. 5,240,856; U.S. Patent No. 5,215,926; WO 89/06280; WO 91/16116 and WO 92/07243).
  • T cells may be derived from related or unrelated humans, non-human mammals, cell lines or cultures.
  • T cells may be stimulated with a polypeptide of the invention, polynucleotide encoding such a polypeptide, and/or an antigen presenting cell (APC) that expresses such a polypeptide.
  • APC antigen presenting cell
  • Such stimulation is performed under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit the generation of T cells that are specific for the polypeptide.
  • the polypeptide or polynucleotide is present within a delivery vehicle, such as a microsphere, to facilitate the generation of specific T cells.
  • T cells are considered to be specific for a polypeptide of the invention if the T cells specifically proliferate, secrete cytokines or kill target cells coated with the polypeptide or expressing a gene encoding the polypeptide.
  • T cell specificity may be evaluated using any of a variety of standard techniques. For example, within a chromium release assay or proliferation assay, a stimulation index of more than two fold increase in lysis and/or proliferation, compared to negative controls, indicates T cell specificity. Such assays may be performed, for example, as described in Chen et al., Cancer Res. 54:1065-1070 (1994)). Alternatively, detection of the proliferation of T cells may be accomplished by a variety of known techniques.
  • T cell proliferation can be detected by measuring an increased rate of DNA synthesis (e.g., by pulse-labeling cultures of T cells with tritiated thymidine and measuring the amount of tritiated thymidine incorporated into DNA).
  • a polypeptide of the invention 100 ng/ml-100 ⁇ g/ml, preferably 200 ng/ml-25 ⁇ g/ml
  • a polypeptide of the invention 100 ng/ml-100 ⁇ g/ml, preferably 200 ng/ml-25 ⁇ g/ml
  • T cells that have been activated in response to a polypeptide, polynucleotide or polypeptide-expressing APC may be CD4 + and/or CD8 + .
  • Protein-specific T cells may be expanded using standard techniques.
  • the T cells are derived from a patient, a related donor or an unrelated donor, and are administered to the patient following stimulation and expansion.
  • CD4 + or CD8 + T cells that proliferate in response to a polypeptide, polynucleotide or APC can be expanded in number either in vitro or in vivo. Proliferation of such T cells in vitro may be accomplished in a variety of ways. For example, the T cells can be re-exposed to a polypeptide, or a short peptide corresponding to an immunogenic portion of such a polypeptide, with or without the addition of T cell growth factors, such as interleukin-2, and/or stimulator cells that synthesize the polypeptide. Alternatively, one or more T cells that proliferate in the presence of the protein can be expanded in number by cloning. Methods for cloning cells are well known in the art, and include limiting dilution.
  • the present invention concerns formulation of one or more of the polynucleotide, polypeptide, T-cell and/or antibody compositions disclosed herein in pharmaceutically-acceptable or physiologically-acceptable solutions for administration to a cell or an animal, either alone, or in combination with one or more other modalities of therapy.
  • Such compositions are also useful for diagnostic uses.
  • the nucleic acid segment, RNA, DNA or PNA compositions that express a polypeptide as disclosed herein may be administered in combination with other agents as well, such as, e.g., other proteins or polypeptides or various pharmaceutically-active agents.
  • agents such as, e.g., other proteins or polypeptides or various pharmaceutically-active agents.
  • the compositions may thus be delivered along with various other agents as required in the particular instance.
  • Such compositions may be purified from host cells or other biological sources, or alternatively may be chemically synthesized as described herein.
  • such compositions may further comprise substituted or derivatized RNA or DNA compositions.
  • Formulation of pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients and carrier solutions is well-known to those of skill in the art, as is the development of suitable dosing and treatment regimens for using the particular compositions described herein in a variety of treatment regimens, including e.g., oral, parenteral, intravenous, intranasal, and intramuscular administration and formulation.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be delivered via oral administration to an animal.
  • these compositions may be formulated with an inert diluent or with an assimilable edible carrier, or they may be enclosed in hard- or soft-shell gelatin capsule, or they may be compressed into tablets, or they may be incorporated directly with the food of the diet.
  • the active compounds may even be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tables, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like (Mathiowitz et al., 1997; Hwang et al., 1998; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515; U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,579 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,792,451, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the tablets, troches, pills, capsules and the like may also contain the following: a binder, as gum tragacanth, acacia, cornstarch, or gelatin; excipients, such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent, such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent, such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin may be added or a flavoring agent, such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry flavoring.
  • a binder as gum tragacanth, acacia, cornstarch, or gelatin
  • excipients such as dicalcium phosphate
  • a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate
  • a sweetening agent such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin may be added or a flavor
  • any material may be present as coatings or to otherwise modify the physical form of the dosage unit.
  • tablets, pills, or capsules may be coated with shellac, sugar, or both.
  • a syrup of elixir may contain the active compound sucrose as a sweetening agent methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and flavoring, such as cherry or orange flavor.
  • any material used in preparing any dosage unit form should be pharmaceutically pure and substantially non-toxic in the amounts employed.
  • the active compounds may be incorporated into sustained-release preparation and formulations.
  • these formulations may contain at least about 0.1% of the active compound or more, although the percentage of the active ingredient(s) may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 1 or 2% and about 60% or 70% or more of the weight or volume of the total formulation.
  • the amount of active compound(s) in each therapeutically useful composition may be prepared is such a way that a suitable dosage will be obtained in any given unit dose of the compound. Factors such as solubility, bioavailability, biological half-life, route of administration, product shelf life, as well as other pharmacological considerations will be contemplated by one skilled in the art of preparing such pharmaceutical formulations, and as such, a variety of dosages and treatment regimens may be desirable.
  • compositions of the present invention may alternatively be incorporated with one or more excipients in the form of a mouthwash, dentifrice, buccal tablet, oral spray, or sublingual orally-administered formulation.
  • a mouthwash may be prepared incorporating the active ingredient in the required amount in an appropriate solvent, such as a sodium borate solution (Dobell's Solution).
  • the active ingredient may be incorporated into an oral solution such as one containing sodium borate, glycerin and potassium bicarbonate, or dispersed in a dentifrice, or added in a therapeutically-effective amount to a composition that may include water, binders, abrasives, flavoring agents, foaming agents, and humectants.
  • the compositions may be fashioned into a tablet or solution form that may be placed under the tongue or otherwise dissolved in the mouth.
  • compositions disclosed herein parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly, or even intraperitoneally as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,363 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • Solutions of the active compounds as free base or pharmacologically acceptable salts may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant, such as hydroxypropylcellulose.
  • Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils.
  • polyol e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • suitable mixtures thereof e.g., vegetable oils
  • vegetable oils e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • suitable mixtures thereof e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • Proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars or sodium chloride.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • aqueous solution for parenteral administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first rendered isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose.
  • aqueous solutions are especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous and intraperitoneal administration.
  • a sterile aqueous medium that can be employed will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure.
  • one dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to 1000 ml of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th Edition, pp.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the active compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in a neutral or salt form.
  • Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, histidine, procaine and the like.
  • solutions Upon formulation, solutions will be administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation and in such amount as is therapeutically effective.
  • the formulations are easily administered in a variety of dosage forms such as injectable solutions, drug-release capsules, and the like.
  • carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like.
  • carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human.
  • aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art.
  • injectables either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared.
  • the preparation can also be emulsified.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be delivered by intranasal sprays, inhalation, and/or other aerosol delivery vehicles.
  • Methods for delivering genes, nucleic acids, and peptide compositions directly to the lungs via nasal aerosol sprays has been described e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,756,353 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,804,212 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the delivery of drugs using intranasal microparticle resins Takenaga et al., 1998) and lysophosphatidyl-glycerol compounds (U.S. Pat. No.
  • the inventors contemplate the use of liposomes, nanocapsules, microparticles, microspheres, lipid particles, vesicles, and the like, for the introduction of the compositions of the present invention into suitable host cells.
  • the compositions of the present invention may be formulated for delivery either encapsulated in a lipid particle, a liposome, a vesicle, a nanosphere, or a nanoparticle or the like.
  • Such formulations may be preferred for the introduction of pharmaceutically-acceptable formulations of the nucleic acids or constructs disclosed herein.
  • liposomes are generally known to those of skill in the art (see for example, Couvreur et al., 1977; Couvreur, 1988; Lasic, 1998; which describes the use of liposomes and nanocapsules in the targeted antibiotic therapy for intracellular bacterial infections and diseases).
  • liposomes were developed with improved serum stability and circulation half-times (Gabizon & Papahadjopoulos, 1988; Allen and Choun, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 5,741,516, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • Liposomes have been used successfully with a number of cell types that are normally resistant to transfection by other procedures including T cell suspensions, primary hepatocyte cultures and PC 12 cells (Renneisen et al., 1990; Muller et al., 1990). In addition, liposomes are free of the DNA length constraints that are typical of viral-based delivery systems.
  • Liposomes have been used effectively to introduce genes, drugs (Heath & Martin, 1986; Heath et al., 1986; Balazsovits et al., 1989; Fresta & Puglisi, 1996), radiotherapeutic agents (Pikul et al., 1987), enzymes (Imaizumi et al., 1990a; Imaizumi et al., 1990b), viruses (Faller & Baltimore, 1984), transcription factors and allosteric effectors (Nicolau & Gersonde, 1979) into a variety of cultured cell lines and animals.
  • Liposomes are formed from phospholipids that are dispersed in an aqueous medium and spontaneously form multilamellar concentric bilayer vesicles (also termed multilamellar vesicles (MLVs).
  • MLVs generally have diameters of from 25 nm to 4 ⁇ m. Sonication of MLVs results in the formation of small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) with diameters in the range of 200 to 500 ⁇ , containing an aqueous solution in the core.
  • SUVs small unilamellar vesicles
  • Liposomes bear resemblance to cellular membranes and are contemplated for use in connection with the present invention as carriers for the peptide compositions. They are widely suitable as both water- and lipid-soluble substances can be entrapped, i.e. in the aqueous spaces and within the bilayer itself, respectively. It is possible that the drug-bearing liposomes may even be employed for site-specific delivery of active agents by selectively modifying the liposomal formulation.
  • Phospholipids can form a variety of structures other than liposomes when dispersed in water, depending on the molar ratio of lipid to water. At low ratios the liposome is the preferred structure.
  • the physical characteristics of liposomes depend on pH, ionic strength and the presence of divalent cations. Liposomes can show low permeability to ionic and polar substances, but at elevated temperatures undergo a phase transition which markedly alters their permeability.
  • phase transition involves a change from a closely packed, ordered structure, known as the gel state, to a loosely packed, less-ordered structure, known as the fluid state. This occurs at a characteristic phase-transition temperature and results in an increase in permeability to ions, sugars and drugs.
  • soluble proteins such as cytochrome c
  • Cholesterol inhibits this penetration of proteins, apparently by packing the phospholipids more tightly. It is contemplated that the most useful liposome formations for antibiotic and inhibitor delivery will contain cholesterol.
  • SUVs have the ability to trap solutes varies between different types of liposomes.
  • MLVs are moderately efficient at trapping solutes, but SUVs are extremely inefficient.
  • SUVs offer the advantage of homogeneity and reproducibility in size distribution, however, and a compromise between size and trapping efficiency is offered by large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs). These are prepared by ether evaporation and are three to four times more efficient at solute entrapment than MLVs.
  • LUVs large unilamellar vesicles
  • an important determinant in entrapping compounds is the physicochemical properties of the compound itself. Polar compounds are trapped in the aqueous spaces and nonpolar compounds bind to the lipid bilayer of the vesicle. Polar compounds are released through permeation or when the bilayer is broken, but nonpolar compounds remain affiliated with the bilayer unless it is disrupted by temperature or exposure to lipoproteins. Both types show maximum efflux rates at the phase transition temperature.
  • Liposomes interact with cells via four different mechanisms: endocytosis by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system such as macrophages and neutrophils; adsorption to the cell surface, either by nonspecific weak hydrophobic or electrostatic forces, or by specific interactions with cell-surface components; fusion with the plasma cell membrane by insertion of the lipid bilayer of the liposome into the plasma membrane, with simultaneous release of liposomal contents into the cytoplasm; and by transfer of liposomal lipids to cellular or subcellular membranes, or vice versa, without any association of the liposome contents. It often is difficult to determine which mechanism is operative and more than one may operate at the same time.
  • liposomes The fate and disposition of intravenously injected liposomes depend on their physical properties, such as size, fluidity, and surface charge. They may persist in tissues for h or days, depending on their composition, and half lives in the blood range from min to several h. Larger liposomes, such as MLVs and LUVs, are taken up rapidly by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system, but physiology of the circulatory system restrains the exit of such large species at most sites. They can exit only in places where large openings or pores exist in the capillary endothelium, such as the sinusoids of the liver or spleen. Thus, these organs are the predominate site of uptake.
  • MLVs and LUVs are taken up rapidly by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system, but physiology of the circulatory system restrains the exit of such large species at most sites. They can exit only in places where large openings or pores exist in the ca
  • SUVs show a broader tissue distribution but still are sequestered highly in the liver and spleen. In general, this in vivo behavior limits the potential targeting of liposomes to only those organs and tissues accessible to their large size. These include the blood, liver, spleen, bone marrow, and lymphoid organs.
  • Antibodies may be used to bind to the liposome surface and to direct the antibody and its drug contents to specific antigenic receptors located on a particular cell-type surface.
  • Carbohydrate determinants may also be used as recognition sites as they have potential in directing liposomes to particular cell types. Usually, it is contemplated that intravenous injection of liposomal preparations would be used, but other routes of administration are also conceivable.
  • the invention provides for pharmaceutically-acceptable nanocapsule formulations of the compositions of the present invention.
  • Nanocapsules can generally entrap compounds in a stable and reproducible way (Henry-Michelland et al., 1987; Quintanar-Guerrero et al., 1998; Douglas et al., 1987).
  • ultrafine particles sized around 0.1 ⁇ m
  • Biodegradable polyalkyl-cyanoacrylate nanoparticles that meet these requirements are contemplated for use in the present invention.
  • Such particles may be are easily made, as described (Couvreur et al., 1980; 1988; zur Muhlen et al., 1998; Zambaux et al. 1998; Pinto-Alphandry et al., 1995 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,145,684, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • vaccines are provided.
  • the vaccines will generally comprise one or more pharmaceutical compositions, such as those discussed above, in combination with an immunostimulant.
  • An immunostimulant may be any substance that enhances or potentiates an immune response (antibody and/or cell-mediated) to an exogenous antigen.
  • immunostimulants include adjuvants, biodegradable microspheres (e.g., polylactic galactide) and liposomes (into which the compound is incorporated; see, e.g., Fullerton, U.S. Pat. No. 4,235,877).
  • Vaccine preparation is generally described in, for example, Powell & Newman, eds., Vaccine Design (the subunit and adjuvant approach) (1995).
  • compositions and vaccines within the scope of the present invention may also contain other compounds, which may be biologically active or inactive.
  • other compounds which may be biologically active or inactive.
  • one or more immunogenic portions of other tumor antigens may be present, either incorporated into a fusion polypeptide or as a separate compound, within the composition or vaccine.
  • Illustrative vaccines may contain DNA encoding one or more of the polypeptides as described above, such that the polypeptide is generated in situ.
  • the DNA may be present within any of a variety of delivery systems known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including nucleic acid expression systems, bacteria and viral expression systems. Numerous gene delivery techniques are well known in the art, such as those described by Rolland, Crit. Rev. Therap. Drug Carrier Systems 15:143-198 (1998), and references cited therein. Appropriate nucleic acid expression systems contain the necessary DNA sequences for expression in the patient (such as a suitable promoter and terminating signal).
  • Bacterial delivery systems involve the administration of a bacterium (such as Bacillus -Calmette-Guerrin) that expresses an immunogenic portion of the polypeptide on its cell surface or secretes such an epitope.
  • the DNA may be introduced using a viral expression system (e.g., vaccinia or other pox virus, retrovirus, or adenovirus), which may involve the use of a non-pathogenic (defective), replication competent virus.
  • vaccinia or other pox virus, retrovirus, or adenovirus e.g., vaccinia or other pox virus, retrovirus, or adenovirus
  • Suitable systems are disclosed, for example, in Fisher-Hoch et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:317-321 (1989); Flexner et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci.
  • a vaccine may comprise both a polynucleotide and a polypeptide component. Such vaccines may provide for an enhanced immune response.
  • a vaccine may contain pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the polynucleotides and polypeptides provided herein.
  • Such salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases, including organic bases (e.g., salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines and basic amino acids) and inorganic bases (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts).
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including for example, topical, oral, nasal, intravenous, intracranial, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular administration.
  • parenteral administration such as subcutaneous injection
  • the carrier preferably comprises water, saline, alcohol, a fat, a wax or a buffer.
  • any of the above carriers or a solid carrier such as mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, talcum, cellulose, glucose, sucrose, and magnesium carbonate, may be employed.
  • Biodegradable microspheres may also be employed as carriers for the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention.
  • Suitable biodegradable microspheres are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,897,268; 5,075,109; 5,928,647; 5,811,128; 5,820,883; 5,853,763; 5,814,344 and 5,942,252.
  • One may also employ a carrier comprising the particulate-protein complexes described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,647, which are capable of inducing a class I-restricted cytotoxic T lymphocyte responses in a host.
  • compositions may also comprise buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, bacteriostats, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione, adjuvants (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), solutes that render the formulation isotonic, hypotonic or weakly hypertonic with the blood of a recipient, suspending agents, thickening agents and/or preservatives.
  • buffers e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline
  • carbohydrates e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans
  • mannitol proteins
  • proteins polypeptides or amino acids
  • proteins e.glycine
  • antioxidants e.g., mannitol
  • an adjuvant may be included.
  • Most adjuvants contain a substance designed to protect the antigen from rapid catabolism, such as aluminum hydroxide or mineral oil, and a stimulator of immune responses, such as lipid A, Bortadella pertussis or Mycobacterium species or Mycobacterium derived proteins.
  • lipid A lipid A
  • Bortadella pertussis lipid A
  • Mycobacterium species lipid A
  • Mycobacterium derived proteins lipid A
  • lipid A lipid A
  • lipid A Bortadella pertussis or Mycobacterium species or Mycobacterium derived proteins.
  • pVac delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae
  • BCG is used as an adjuvant.
  • the vaccine can be administered to a subject previously exposed to BCG.
  • Suitable adjuvants are commercially available as, for example, Freund's Incomplete Adjuvant and Complete Adjuvant (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.); Merck Adjuvant 65 (Merck and Company, Inc., Rahway, N.J.); AS-2 and derivatives thereof (SmithKline Beecham, Philadelphia, Pa.); CWS, TDM, Leif, aluminum salts such as aluminum hydroxide gel (alum) or aluminum phosphate; salts of calcium, iron or zinc; an insoluble suspension of acylated tyrosine; acylated sugars; cationically or anionically derivatized polysaccharides; polyphosphazenes; biodegradable microspheres; monophosphoryl lipid A and quil A. Cytokines, such as GM-CSF or interleukin-2, -7, or -12, may also be used as adjuvants.
  • Cytokines such as GM-CSF or interleukin-2, -7, or -12, may also be used
  • the adjuvant composition is preferably designed to induce an immune response predominantly of the Th1 type.
  • High levels of Th1-type cytokines e.g., IFN- ⁇ , TNF ⁇ , IL-2 and IL-12
  • Th2-type cytokines e.g., IL-4, IL-5, IL-6 and IL-10
  • a patient will support an immune response that includes Th1- and Th2-type responses.
  • Th1-type cytokines will increase to a greater extent than the level of Th2-type cytokines.
  • the levels of these cytokines may be readily assessed using standard assays. For a review of the families of cytokines, see Mosmann & Coffman, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 7:145-173 (1989).
  • Preferred adjuvants for use in eliciting a predominantly Th1-type response include, for example, a combination of monophosphoryl lipid A, preferably 3-de-O-acylated monophosphoryl lipid A (3D-MPL), together with an aluminum salt.
  • MPL adjuvants are available from Corixa Corporation (Seattle, Wash.; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,436,727; 4,877,611; 4,866,034 and 4,912,094).
  • CpG-containing oligonucleotides in which the CpG dinucleotide is unmethylated also induce a predominantly Th1 response.
  • oligonucleotides are well known and are described, for example, in WO 96/02555, WO 99/33488 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,008,200 and 5,856,462. Immunostimulatory DNA sequences are also described, for example, by Sato et al., Science 273:352 (1996).
  • Another preferred adjuvant comprises a saponin, such as Quil A, or derivatives thereof, including QS21 and QS7 (Aquila Biopharmaceuticals Inc., Framingham, Mass.); Escin; Digitonin; or Gypsophila or Chenopodium quinoa saponins.
  • Other preferred formulations include more than one saponin in the adjuvant combinations of the present invention, for example combinations of at least two of the following group comprising QS21, QS7, Quil A, ⁇ -escin, or digitonin.
  • the saponin formulations may be combined with vaccine vehicles composed of chitosan or other polycationic polymers, polylactide and polylactide-co-glycolide particles, poly-N-acetyl glucosamine-based polymer matrix, particles composed of polysaccharides or chemically modified polysaccharides, liposomes and lipid-based particles, particles composed of glycerol monoesters, etc.
  • vaccine vehicles composed of chitosan or other polycationic polymers, polylactide and polylactide-co-glycolide particles, poly-N-acetyl glucosamine-based polymer matrix, particles composed of polysaccharides or chemically modified polysaccharides, liposomes and lipid-based particles, particles composed of glycerol monoesters, etc.
  • the saponins may also be formulated in the presence of cholesterol to form particulate structures such as liposomes or ISCOMs.
  • the saponins may be formulated together with a polyoxyethylene ether or ester, in either a non-particulate solution or suspension, or in a particulate structure such as a paucilamelar liposome or ISCOM.
  • the saponins may also be formulated with excipients such as Carbopol R to increase viscosity, or may be formulated in a dry powder form with a powder excipient such as lactose.
  • the adjuvant system includes the combination of a monophosphoryl lipid A and a saponin derivative, such as the combination of QS21 and 3D-MPL® adjuvant, as described in WO 94/00153, or a less reactogenic composition where the QS21 is quenched with cholesterol, as described in WO 96/33739.
  • a monophosphoryl lipid A and a saponin derivative such as the combination of QS21 and 3D-MPL® adjuvant, as described in WO 94/00153
  • a less reactogenic composition where the QS21 is quenched with cholesterol
  • Other preferred formulations comprise an oil-in-water emulsion and tocopherol.
  • Another particularly preferred adjuvant formulation employing QS21, 3D-MPL® adjuvant and tocopherol in an oil-in-water emulsion is described in WO 95/17210.
  • Another enhanced adjuvant system involves the combination of a CpG-containing oligonucleotide and a saponin derivative particularly the combination of CpG and QS21 as disclosed in WO 00/09159.
  • the formulation additionally comprises an oil in water emulsion and tocopherol.
  • n 1-50
  • A is a bond or —C(O)—
  • R is C 1-50 alkyl or Phenyl C 1-50 alkyl.
  • One embodiment of the present invention consists of a vaccine formulation comprising a polyoxyethylene ether of general formula (I), wherein n is between 1 and 50, preferably 4-24, most preferably 9; the R component is C 1-50 , preferably C 4 -C 20 alkyl and most preferably C 12 alkyl, and A is a bond.
  • the concentration of the polyoxyethylene ethers should be in the range 0.1-20%, preferably from 0.1-10%, and most preferably in the range 0.1-1%.
  • Preferred polyoxyethylene ethers are selected from the following group: polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-9-steoryl ether, polyoxyethylene-8-steoryl ether, polyoxyethylene-4-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-35-lauryl ether, and polyoxyethylene-23-lauryl ether.
  • Polyoxyethylene ethers such as polyoxyethylene lauryl ether are described in the Merck index (12 th edition: entry 7717). These adjuvant molecules are described in WO 99/52549.
  • polyoxyethylene ether according to the general formula (I) above may, if desired, be combined with another adjuvant.
  • a preferred adjuvant combination is preferably with CpG as described in the pending UK patent application GB 9820956.2.
  • compositions described herein may be administered as part of a sustained release formulation (i.e., a formulation such as a capsule, sponge or gel (composed of polysaccharides, for example) that effects a slow release of compound following administration).
  • sustained release formulations i.e., a formulation such as a capsule, sponge or gel (composed of polysaccharides, for example) that effects a slow release of compound following administration.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology (see, e.g., Coombes et al., Vaccine 14:1429-1438 (1996)) and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Sustained-release formulations may contain a polypeptide, polynucleotide or antibody dispersed in a carrier matrix and/or contained within a reservoir surrounded by a rate controlling membrane.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of active component release.
  • Such carriers include microparticles of poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyacrylate, latex, starch, cellulose, dextran and the like.
  • Other delayed-release carriers include supramolecular biovectors, which comprise a non-liquid hydrophilic core (e.g., a cross-linked polysaccharide or oligosaccharide) and, optionally, an external layer comprising an amphiphilic compound, such as a phospholipid (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
  • APCs antigen presenting cells
  • APCs may, but need not, be genetically modified to increase the capacity for presenting the antigen, to improve activation and/or maintenance of the T cell response, to have anti-tumor effects per se and/or to be immunologically compatible with the receiver (i.e., matched HLA haplotype).
  • APCs may generally be isolated from any of a variety of biological fluids and organs, including tumor and peritumoral tissues, and may be autologous, allogeneic, syngeneic or xenogeneic cells.
  • Dendritic cells are highly potent APCs (Banchereau & Steinman, Nature 392:245-251 (1998)) and have been shown to be effective as a physiological adjuvant for eliciting prophylactic or therapeutic antitumor immunity (see Timmerman & Levy, Ann. Rev. Med. 50:507-529 (1999)).
  • dendritic cells may be identified based on their typical shape (stellate in situ, with marked cytoplasmic processes (dendrites) visible in vitro), their ability to take up, process and present antigens with high efficiency and their ability to activate naive T cell responses.
  • Dendritic cells may, of course, be engineered to express specific cell-surface receptors or ligands that are not commonly found on dendritic cells in vivo or ex vivo, and such modified dendritic cells are contemplated by the present invention.
  • secreted vesicles antigen-loaded dendritic cells called exosomes
  • exosomes antigen-loaded dendritic cells
  • Dendritic cells and progenitors may be obtained from peripheral blood, bone marrow, tumor-infiltrating cells, peritumoral tissues-infiltrating cells, lymph nodes, spleen, skin, umbilical cord blood or any other suitable tissue or fluid.
  • dendritic cells may be differentiated ex vivo by adding a combination of cytokines such as GM-CSF, IL-4, IL-13 and/or TNF ⁇ to cultures of monocytes harvested from peripheral blood.
  • CD34 positive cells harvested from peripheral blood, umbilical cord blood or bone marrow may be differentiated into dendritic cells by adding to the culture medium combinations of GM-CSF, IL-3, TNF ⁇ , CD40 ligand, LPS, flt3 ligand and/or other compound(s) that induce differentiation, maturation and proliferation of dendritic cells.
  • Dendritic cells are conveniently categorized as “immature” and “mature” cells, which allows a simple way to discriminate between two well characterized phenotypes. However, this nomenclature should not be construed to exclude all possible intermediate stages of differentiation. Immature dendritic cells are-characterized as APC with a high capacity for antigen uptake and processing, which correlates with the high expression of Fc ⁇ receptor and mannose receptor.
  • the mature phenotype is typically characterized by a lower expression of these markers, but a high expression of cell surface molecules responsible for T cell activation such as class I and class II MHC, adhesion molecules (e.g., CD54 and CD11) and costimulatory molecules (e.g., CD40, CD80, CD86 and 4-1BB).
  • cell surface molecules responsible for T cell activation such as class I and class II MHC, adhesion molecules (e.g., CD54 and CD11) and costimulatory molecules (e.g., CD40, CD80, CD86 and 4-1BB).
  • APCs may generally be transfected with a polynucleotide encoding a protein (or portion or other variant thereof) such that the polypeptide, or an immunogenic portion thereof, is expressed on the cell surface. Such transfection may take place ex vivo, and a composition or vaccine comprising such transfected cells may then be used for therapeutic purposes, as described herein. Alternatively, a gene delivery vehicle that targets a dendritic or other antigen presenting cell may be administered to a patient, resulting in transfection that occurs in vivo.
  • In vivo and ex vivo transfection of dendritic cells may generally be performed using any methods known in the art, such as those described in WO 97/24447, or the gene gun approach described by Mahvi et al., Immunology and Cell Biology 75:456-460 (1997).
  • Antigen loading of dendritic cells may be achieved by incubating dendritic cells or progenitor cells with the polypeptide, DNA (naked or within a plasmid vector) or RNA; or with antigen-expressing recombinant bacterium or viruses (e.g., vaccinia, fowlpox, adenovirus or lentivirus vectors).
  • the polypeptide Prior to loading, the polypeptide may be covalently conjugated to an immunological partner that provides T cell help (e.g., a carrier molecule).
  • an immunological partner that provides T cell help e.g., a carrier molecule.
  • a dendritic cell may be pulsed with a non-conjugated immunological partner, separately or in the presence of the polypeptide.
  • Vaccines and pharmaceutical compositions may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, such as sealed ampoules or vials. Such containers are preferably hermetically sealed to preserve sterility of the formulation until use.
  • formulations may be stored as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles.
  • a vaccine or pharmaceutical composition may be stored in a freeze-dried condition requiring only the addition of a sterile liquid carrier immediately prior to use.
  • kits for use within any of the above diagnostic methods.
  • Such kits typically comprise two or more components necessary for performing a diagnostic assay.
  • Components may be compounds, reagents, containers and/or equipment.
  • one container within a kit may contain a monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof that specifically binds to a protein.
  • Such antibodies or fragments may be provided attached to a support material, as described above.
  • One or more additional containers may enclose elements, such as reagents or buffers, to be used in the assay.
  • Such kits may also, or alternatively, contain a detection reagent as described above that contains a reporter group suitable for direct or indirect detection of antibody binding.
  • kits may be designed to detect the level of mRNA encoding a protein in a biological sample.
  • kits generally comprise at least one oligonucleotide probe or primer, as described above, that hybridizes to a polynucleotide encoding a protein.
  • Such an oligonucleotide may be used, for example, within a PCR or hybridization assay. Additional components that may be present within such kits include a second oligonucleotide and/or a diagnostic reagent or container to facilitate the detection of a polynucleotide encoding a protein of the invention.
  • Guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS1, SBAS2, or ASAS7 plus A1(OH)3), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9 plus Ra35 antigen composition.
  • Methods Groups: 1) SBAS1 2) SBAS2 3) SBAS7 + Al(OH)3 4) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS1 5) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS2 6) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS7(Al(OH)3) 7) MTB72F in SBAS1 8) MTB72F in SBAS2 9) MTB72F in SBAS7 + Al(OH)3 10)
  • BCG 4 ⁇ g each of TbH9 and Ra35 8 ⁇ g MTB72F
  • Protocol 1st immunization, 2nd immunization approximately 3 weeks later, 3rd immunization approximately two and a half weeks later.
  • DTH delayed type hypersensitivity, used to determine antigenicity; 10 ⁇ g antigen
  • mice were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS2, SBAS2′, SBAS2′′, or SBAS6), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, MTB72F DNA, MTB59F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition.
  • Methods Groups: 1) MTB72F + SBAS2 2) MTB72F + SBAS2′ 3) MTB72F + SBAS2′′ 4) MTB72F + SBAS6 5) Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35 in SBAS2 6) MTB59F in SBAS2 7) SBAS2 8) MTB72F + delipidated, deglycolipidated M.
  • MTB72F DNA MTB72F + IFA 11) MTB72F + BCG 12) delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae 13) BCG 14) Saline 15) MTB72F + SBAS2 (in house formulation)
  • Immunization schedule First immunization, second immunization approximately 3 weeks later; third immunization approximately three weeks later.
  • Spleen or lung cells were isolated and cultured; count CFU of cultures approximately three weeks after plating.
  • guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS2, SBAS2′, SBAS2′′, or SBAS6), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, MTB72F DNA, MTB59F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition.
  • Antigens were formulated on a molar equivalent
  • Injection volume per dose is 250 ⁇ l (IM) containing MTB72F 20 ⁇ g Ra12, TbH9, Ra35 3.8, 10.8, and 5.6 ⁇ g MTB59F 16.4 ⁇ g
  • guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (AS2 or AS2′′), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition, or a variety of individual antigens in adjuvant.
  • monkeys were immunized with MTB72F fusion protein in SBAS2 adjuvant, or MTB8.4 antigen composition in adjuvant, or a mixture of MTB72F and MTB8.4.
  • Groups 4 and 5 have four animals each. Two of the BCG immunized monkeys died Antigens for T cell Immunizing proliferation and cytokine Groups # animals Antigen production assays 1. None 5 AS2 PHA, PPD, MTB72F, MTB71F, HTCC#1, DPV, MTCC#2, Ra12, TbH9, Ra35, MSL, MTI 2. BCG 5 AS2 PHA, PPD, MTB72F, MTB71F, HTCC#1, DPV, MTCC#2, Ra12, TbH9, Ra35, MSL, MTI 3. BCG 5 MTB72F PHA, PPD, MTB72F, Ra12, TbH9, Ra35 4.
  • Ra35FL As two overlapping halves comprising the N-terminal (Ra35N-term, called Ra35) and C— term halves (Ra35C-term called Ra12).
  • Ra35N-term N-terminal
  • Ra35C-term C— term halves
  • This stabilization is also readily accomplished by mutagenizing any one, any two, or all three of the three residues comprising the active site triad in Ra35FL, Ra35, or Mtb72F or other fusion proteins comprising Ra35 (His, Asp, or Ser). Mutagenesis can be performed using any technique known to one of skill in the art.
  • mice per group were immunized with the compositions listed below, which include the adjuvant AS2A. The mice were then challenged with Mycobacterium tuberculosis, and survival of the mice was measured.
  • Group Concentration of protein or DNA 1. Mtb72f protein 1.5 mg/ml 2. Mtb72f DNA 1.2 mg/ml 3. Mtb72f-85b protein 0.6 mg/ml 4. Mtb72f-85b DNA 1.1 mg/ml 5. Mtb72f-MTI protein 1.3 mg/ml 6. Mtb72f-MTI DNA 1.1 mg/ml 7. Mtb72f MutSA protein 1.7 mg/ml 8. MTB3AMutSA-TbH9 protein 2.4 mg/ml 9.
  • BCG 10. AS2 11. vector alone 1.5 mg/ml 12. saline

Abstract

The present invention relates to compositions and fusion proteins containing at least two Mycobacterium sp. antigens, and nucleic acids encoding such compositions and fusion proteins. The compositions of the invention increase serological sensitivity of sera from individuals infected with tuberculosis, and methods for their use in the diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of tuberculosis infection.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • The present application claims priority to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/597,796, filed Jun. 20, 2000, and U.S. patent application No. 60/265,737, filed Feb. 1, 2001, herein each incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • The present application is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/056,556, filed Apr. 7, 1998; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/223,040, filed Dec. 30, 1998; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849, filed Apr. 7, 1999; published PCT application No. WO99/51748, filed Apr. 7, 1999 (PCT/US99/07717), U.S. patent application No. 60/158,338, filed Oct. 7, 1999, and U.S. application No. 60/158,425, filed Oct. 7, 1999; U.S. application Ser. No. 09/688,672, filed Oct. 10, 2000; and published PCT application No. WO01/24820, filed Oct. 10, 2000 (PCT/US00/28095); herein each incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • STATEMENT AS TO RIGHTS TO INVENTIONS MADE UNDER FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
  • Not applicable.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to fusion proteins containing at least two Mycobacterium sp. antigens. In particular, it relates to nucleic acids encoding fusion proteins that include two or more individual M. tuberculosis antigens, which increase serological sensitivity of sera from individuals infected with tuberculosis, and methods for their use in the diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of tuberculosis infection.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Tuberculosis is a chronic infectious disease caused by infection with M. tuberculosis and other Mycobacterium species. It is a major disease in developing countries, as well as an increasing problem in developed areas of the world, with about 8 million new cases and 3 million deaths each year. Although the infection may be asymptomatic for a considerable period of time, the disease is most commonly manifested as an acute inflammation of the lungs, resulting in fever and a nonproductive cough. If untreated, serious complications and death typically result.
  • Although tuberculosis can generally be controlled using extended antibiotic therapy, such treatment is not sufficient to prevent the spread of the disease. Infected individuals may be asymptomatic, but contagious, for some time. In addition, although compliance with the treatment regimen is critical, patient behavior is difficult to monitor. Some patients do not complete the course of treatment, which can lead to ineffective treatment and the development of drug resistance.
  • In order to control the spread of tuberculosis, effective vaccination and accurate early diagnosis of the disease are of utmost importance. Currently, vaccination with live bacteria is the most efficient method for inducing protective immunity. The most common mycobacterium employed for this purpose is Bacillus Calmette-Guerin (BCG), an avirulent strain of M. bovis. However, the safety and efficacy of BCG is a source of controversy and some countries, such as the United States, do not vaccinate the general public with this agent.
  • Diagnosis of tuberculosis is commonly achieved using a skin test, which involves intradermal exposure to tuberculin PPD (protein-purified derivative). Antigen-specific T cell responses result in measurable induration at the injection site by 48-72 hours after injection, which indicates exposure to mycobacterial antigens. Sensitivity and specificity have, however, been a problem with this test, and individuals vaccinated with BCG cannot be distinguished from infected individuals.
  • While macrophages have been shown to act as the principal effectors of Mycobacterium immunity, T cells are the predominant inducers of such immunity. The essential role of T cells in protection against Mycobacterium infection is illustrated by the frequent occurrence of Mycobacterium infection in AIDS patients, due to the depletion of CD4+ T cells associated with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection. Mycobacterium-reactive CD4+ T cells have been shown to be potent producers of γ-interferon (IFN-γ), which, in turn, has been shown to trigger the anti-mycobacterial effects of macrophages in mice. While the role of IFN-γ in humans is less clear, studies have shown that 1,25-dihydroxy-vitamin D3, either alone or in combination with IFN-γ or tumor necrosis factor-alpha, activates human macrophages to inhibit M. tuberculosis infection. Furthermore, it is known that IFN-γ stimulates human macrophages to make 1,25-dihydroxy-vitamin D3. Similarly, interleukin-12 (IL-12) has been shown to play a role in stimulating resistance to M. tuberculosis infection. For a review of the immunology of M. tuberculosis infection, see Chan & Kaufmann, Tuberculosis: Pathogenesis, Protection and Control (Bloom ed., 1994), and Harrison 's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998).
  • Accordingly, there is a need for improved diagnostic reagents, and improved methods for diagnosis, preventing and treating tuberculosis.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention therefore provides compositions comprising at least two heterologous antigens, fusion proteins comprising the antigens, and nucleic acids encoding the antigens, where the antigens are from a Mycobacterium species from the tuberculosis complex and other Mycobacterium species that cause opportunistic infections in immune compromised patients. The present invention also relates methods of using the polypeptides and polynucleotides in the diagnosis, treatment and prevention of Mycobacterium infection.
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides compositions and fusion proteins comprising a mutated version of Ra35 (N-terminal portion of MTB32A) or Ra35FL (full length MTB32A), in which one, two, or three of the three amino acids histidine, aspartate, or serine at the active site has been mutated to a different amino acid. In one embodiment, in Ra35FL, the serine at position 183 has been mutated to an alanine residue, creating Ra35FLMutSA. In one embodiment, the DNA encoding Ra35FL has been mutated by changing a T to a G, resulting in a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid 183 of SEQ ID NO:4. In another embodiment, the present invention provides the fusion protein MTB72FMutSA, in which the Ra35 component of the fusion protein has a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid position 710 of the MTB72F sequence. In another embodiment, the present invention provides a nucleic acid encoding the fusion protein MTB72F, in which the nucleic acid encoding the Ra35 component has been mutated by changing a T to a G, resulting in a serine to alanine mutation at amino acid position 710 of the MTB72F sequence.
  • The present invention is based, in part, on the inventors' discovery that fusion polynucleotides, fusion polypeptides, or compositions that contain at least two heterologous M. tuberculosis coding sequences or antigens are highly antigenic and upon administration to a patient increase the sensitivity of tuberculosis sera. In addition, the compositions, fusion polypeptides and polynucleotides are useful as diagnostic tools in patients that may have been infected with Mycobacterium.
  • In one aspect, the compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention are used in in vitro and in vivo assays for detecting humoral antibodies or cell-mediated immunity against M. tuberculosis for diagnosis of infection or monitoring of disease progression. For example, the polypeptides may be used as an in vivo diagnostic agent in the form of an intradermal skin test. The polypeptides may also be used in in vitro tests such as an ELISA with patient serum. Alternatively, the nucleic acids, the compositions, and the fusion polypeptides may be used to raise anti-M. tuberculosis antibodies in a non-human animal. The antibodies can be used to detect the target antigens in vivo and in vitro.
  • In another aspect, the compositions, fusion polypeptides and nucleic acids may be used as immunogens to generate or elicit a protective immune response in a patient. The isolated or purified polynucleotides are used to produce recombinant fusion polypeptide antigens in vitro, which are then administered as a vaccine. Alternatively, the polynucleotides may be administered directly into a subject as DNA vaccines to cause antigen expression in the subject, and the subsequent induction of an anti-M. tuberculosis immune response. Thus, the isolated or purified M. tuberculosis polypeptides and nucleic acids of the invention may be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions for administration into a subject in the prevention and/or treatment of M. tuberculosis infection. The immunogenicity of the fusion protein or antigens may be enhanced by the inclusion of an adjuvant, as well as additional fusion polypeptides, from Mycobacterium or other organisms, such as bacterial, viral, mammalian polypeptides. Additional polypeptides may also be included in the compositions, either linked or unlinked to the fusion polypeptide or compositions.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows percent survival of Guinea pigs vaccinated with MTB72F polyprotein.
  • FIG. 2 shows CFUs from spleen cells (FIG. 2A) and lung cells after immunization with MTB72F, MTB59F, MTB72F DNA, or a composition comprising Ra12, TbH9, and Ra35 antigens.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of MTB72F.
  • FIG. 4 shows the nucleotide and amino acid sequence of Ra35 (195 amino acids from the N-terminal portion of MTB32A).
  • FIG. 5 shows an alignment of the amino acid sequences of MTB72F and the mutated version MTB72FMutSA.
  • FIG. 6 shows an alignment of the amino acid sequences of mature (full length) Ra35/MTB32A and the mutated version Ra35FLMutSA.
  • FIG. 7 shows long term survival of guinea pigs vaccinated with Mtb72F formulations.
  • DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIFIC EMBODIMENTS
  • The present invention relates to compositions comprising antigen compositions and fusion polypeptides useful for the diagnosis and treatment of Mycobacterium infection, polynucleotides encoding such antigens, and methods for their use. The antigens of the present invention are polypeptides or fusion polypeptides of Mycobacterium antigens and immunogenic thereof. More specifically, the compositions of the present invention comprise at least two heterologous polypeptides of a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, e.g., a species such as M. tuberculosis, M. bovis, or M. africanum, or a Mycobacterium species that is environmental or opportunistic and that causes opportunistic infections such as lung infections in immune compromised hosts (e.g., patients with AIDS), e.g., BCG, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. celatum, M. genavense, M. haemophilum, M. kansasii, M. simiae, M. vaccae, M. fortuitum, and M. scrofulaceum (see, e.g., Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998). The inventors of the present application surprisingly discovered that compositions and fusion proteins comprising at least two heterologous Mycobacterium antigens, or immunogenic fragments thereof, where highly antigenic. These compositions, fusion polypeptides, and the nucleic acids that encode them are therefore useful for eliciting protective response in patients, and for diagnostic applications.
  • The antigens of the present invention may further comprise other components designed to enhance the antigenicity of the antigens or to improve these antigens in other aspects, for example, the isolation of these antigens through addition of a stretch of histidine residues at one end of the antigen. The compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention can comprise additional copies of antigens, or additional heterologous polypeptides from Mycobacterium sp., such as MTB8.4 antigen, MTB9.8 antigen, MTB9.9 antigen, MTB40 antigen, MTB41 antigen, 38-1, TbRa3, 38 kD, DPEP, TbH4, DPPD, ESAT-6 antigen, MTB85 complex antigen (e.g., MTB85b), or α-crystalline antigen, and Erd14. The compositions, fusion polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the invention can also comprise additional heterologous polypeptides from other non-Mycobacterium sources. For example, the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention can include polypeptides or nucleic acids encoding polypeptides, wherein the polypeptide enhances expression of the antigen, e.g., NS1, an influenza virus protein, or an immunogenic portion thereof (see, e.g. WO99/40188 and WO93/04175). The nucleic acids of the invention can be engineered based on codon preference in a species of choice, e.g., humans.
  • The compositions of the invention can be naked DNA, or the compositions, e.g., polypeptides can also comprise adjuvants, e.g., MPL, 3D-MPL, IFA, AS adjuvants such as AS2, AS2′, AS2″, AS4, AS6, ENHANZYN (Detox), QS21, CWS, TDM, AGP, CPG, Leif, saponin, and saponin mimetics, and derivatives thereof. In addition, the compositions of the invention can comprise BCG or Pvac as an adjuvant.
  • In one embodiment, the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention are composed of at least two antigens selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a MTB32A antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • In another embodiment, the antigens are selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a polypeptide comprising at least 205 amino acids of the N-terminus of a MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • In another embodiment, the antigens are selected from the group consisting of a MTB39 antigen or an immunogenic fragment thereof from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, a polypeptide comprising at least about 205 amino acids of the N-terminus of a MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex, and a polypeptide comprising at least about 132 amino acids from the C-terminus of MTB32A antigen from a Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex.
  • In the nomenclature of the application, Ra35 refers to the N-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 195 to 205 amino acids of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, or the corresponding region from another Mycobacterium species. Ra12 refers to the C-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about the last 132 amino acids from MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, or the corresponding region from another Mycobacterium species.
  • The following provides sequences of some antigens used in the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention:
  • SEQ ID NO:1-4: MTB32A (Ra35FL or Ra35 mature), the sequence of which is also disclosed as SEQ ID NO:17 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:79 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 08/523,436, 08/523,435, Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112, Ser. No. 09/056,556, and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications, see also Skeiky et al., Infection and Immunity 67:3998-4007 (1999). The term MTB32A also includes MTB32A amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad (His, Asp, Ser), e.g., the serine residue at amino acid position 207 in SEQ ID NO:2 or amino acid position 183 in SEQ ID NO:4, has been changed to another amino acid (e.g., alanine, Ra35FLMutSA, see, e.g., FIG. 6 and SEQ ID NO:6).
  • SEQ ID NO:5 and 6: Ra35FLMut SA, the mature version of RA35FL in which the serine residue at amino acid position 183 of SEQ ID NO:4 has been changed to an alanine residue.
  • SEQ ID NO:7 and 8: Ra35, the N-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 195 amino acids from the N-terminus of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis, the nucleotide and amino acid sequence of which is disclosed in FIG. 4 (see also amino acids 33-227 of SEQ ID NO:2 and amino acids 8 to 202 of SEQ ID NO:4). The term Ra35 (N-term) also includes Ra35 amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad (i.e., His, Asp, or Ser) has been changed as described above.
  • SEQ ID NO:9 and 10: MTBRa12, the C-terminus of MTB32A (Ra35FL), comprising at least about 132 amino acids from the C-terminus of MTB32A from M. tuberculosis (see, e.g., amino acids 224 to 355 of SEQ ID NO:2 and amino acids 199 to 330 of SEQ ID NO:4), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:4 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:66 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967.
  • SEQ ID NO:11, 12, 13, and 14: MTB39 (TbH9), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:106 (cDNA full length) and SEQ ID NO:107 (protein full length) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112, and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications. The sequence is also disclosed as SEQ ID NO:33 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:91 (amino acid) in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/056,559.
  • The following provides sequences of some fusion proteins of the invention
  • SEQ ID NO:15 and 16: MTB72F (Ra12-TbH9-Ra35), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:1 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:2 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/223,040, Ser. No. 09/223,040, and in the PCT/US99/07717 application. The term MTB372F also includes MTB72F amino acid sequences in which any one of the three amino acids at the active site triad in Ra35FL (i.e., His, Asp, or Ser), has been changed as described above (see, e.g., MTB72FMutSA, FIG. 5).
  • SEQ ID NO:17 and 18: MTB72FMutSA (Ra12-TbH9-Ra35MutSA), wherein, in the Ra35 component of the fusion protein, the serine at position 710 has been changed to an alanine.
  • SEQ ID NO:19 and 20: TbH9-Ra35 (MTB59F), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:23 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:24 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • The following provides sequences of some additional antigens used in the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention:
  • SEQ ID NO: 21 and 22: MTB8.4 (DPV), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:101 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:102 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/658,800, Ser. No. 08/659,683, Ser. No. 08/818,112 and Ser. No. 08/818,111 and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:23 and 24: MTB9.8 (MSL), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:12 (DNA), SEQ ID NO:109 (predicted amino acid sequence) and SEQ ID NO:110 to 124 (peptides) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/859,381, Ser. No. 08/858,998, Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:25, 26, and 27: MTB9.9A (MTI, also known as MTI-A), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:3 and SEQ ID NO:4 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:29 and SEQ ID NO:51 to 66 (ORF peptide for MTI) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/859,381, Ser. No. 08/858,998, Ser. No. 09/073,009 and v09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications. Two other MTI variants also exist, called MTI-B and MTI-C.
  • SEQ ID NO:28 and 29: MTB40 (HTCC#1), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:137 (cDNA) and 138 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:30 and 31: MTB41 (MTCC#2), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:140 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:142 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/073,009 and Ser. No. 09/073,010 and in the PCT/US98/10407 and PCT/US98/10514 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:32 and 33: ESAT-6, the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:103 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:104 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967. The sequence of ESAT-6 is also disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,955,077.
  • SEQ ID NO:34 and 35: Tb38-1 or 38-1 (MTb11), the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:46 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:88 (predicted amino acid) in the U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 09/072,96; 08/523,436; 08/523,435; 08/818,112; and 08/818,111; and in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:36 and 37: TbRa3, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:15 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:77 (predicted amino acid sequence) of WO 97/09428 and WO97/09429 applications.
  • SEQ ID NO:38 and 39: 38 kD, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:154 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:155 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/072,967. 38 kD has two alternative forms, with and without the N-terminal cysteine residue.
  • SEQ ID NO:40 and 41: DPEP, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:52 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:53 (predicted amino acid sequence) in the WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 publications.
  • SEQ ID NO:42 and 43: TbH4, the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:43 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:81 (predicted amino acid sequence) in WO97/09428 and WO97/09429 publications.
  • SEQ ID NO:44 and 45: DPPD, the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:240 (DNA) and SEQ ID NO:241 (predicted amino acid sequence) in U.S. Ser. No. 09/072,967 and in the PCT/US99/03268 and PCT/US99/03265 applications. The secreted form of DPPD is shown herein in FIG. 12 of PCT/US00/28095.
  • MTb82 (MTb867), the sequence of which is disclosed in FIGS. 8 (DNA) and 9 (amino acid) of PCT/US00/2809.
  • Erd14 (MTb16), the cDNA and amino acids sequences of which are disclosed in Verbon et al., J. Bacteriology 174:1352-1359 (1992).
  • α-crystalline antigen, the sequence of which is disclosed in Verbon et al., J. Bact. 174:1352-1359 (1992);
  • 85 complex antigen, e.g., 85b antigen, the sequence of which is disclosed in Content et al., Infect. & Immunol. 59:3205-3212 (1991).
  • The following provides sequences of some additional fusion proteins used in the compositions and fusion proteins of the invention:
  • SEQ ID NO:46 and 47: DPV-MTI-MSL-MTCC#2 (MTb71F), the sequence of which is disclosed as SEQ ID NO:15 (nucleic acid) and in SEQ ID NO:16: (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • SEQ ID NO:48 and 49: DPV-MTI-MSL (MTb31F), the sequence of which is disclosed in SEQ ID NO:18 (cDNA) and SEQ ID NO:19 (protein) in the U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/287,849 and in the PCT/US99/07717 application.
  • Each of the above sequences is also disclosed in Cole et al. Nature 393:537 (1998) and can be found at, e.g., http://www.sanger.ac.uk and http:/www.pasteur.fr/mycdb/.
  • The above sequences are disclosed in U.S. patent applications Ser. Nos. 08/523,435, 08/523,436, 08/658,800, 08/659,683, 08/818,111, 08/818,112, 08/942,341, 08/942,578, 08/858,998, 08/859,381, 09/056,556, 09/072,596, 09/072,967, 09/073,009, 09/073,010, 09/223,040, 09/287,849 09/597,796; and in PCT patent applications PCT/US00/28095; PCT/US98/10407, PCT/US98/10514, PCT/US99/03265, PCT/US99/03268, PCT/US99/07717, WO97/09428 and WO97/09429, WO98/16645, WO98/16646, each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • The antigens described herein include polymorphic variants and conservatively modified variations, as well as inter-strain and interspecies Mycobacterium homologs. In addition, the antigens described herein include subsequences or truncated sequences. The fusion proteins may also contain additional polypeptides, optionally heterologous peptides from Mycobacterium or other sources. These antigens may be modified, for example, by adding linker peptide sequences as described below. These linker peptides may be inserted between one or more polypeptides which make up each of the fusion proteins.
  • DEFINITIONS
  • “Fusion polypeptide” or “fusion protein” refers to a protein having at least two heterologous Mycobacterium sp. polypeptides covalently linked, either directly or via an amino acid linker. The polypeptides forming the fusion protein are typically linked C— terminus to N-terminus, although they can also be linked C-terminus to C-terminus, N— terminus to N-terminus, or N-terminus to C-terminus. The polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order. This term also refers to conservatively modified variants, polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, subsequences, interspecies homologs, and immunogenic fragments of the antigens that make up the fusion protein. Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens are described in Cole et al., Nature 393:537 (1998), which discloses the entire Mycobacterium tuberculosis genome. The complete sequence of Mycobacterium tuberculosis can also be found at http://www.sanger.ac.uk and at http://www.pasteur.fr/mycdb/(MycDB). Antigens from other Mycobacterium species that correspond to M. tuberculosis antigens can be identified, e.g., using sequence comparison algorithms, as described herein, or other methods known to those of skill in the art, e.g., hybridization assays and antibody binding assays. Fusion proteins of the invention can also comprise additional copies of a component antigen or immunogenic fragment thereof.
  • A polynucleotide sequence comprising a fusion protein of the invention hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least two nucleotide sequences, each encoding an antigen polypeptide selected from the group consisting of MTB39 or an immunogenic fragment thereof and MTB32A or an immunogenic fragment thereof. The polynucleotide sequences encoding the individual antigens of the fusion polypeptide therefore include conservatively modified variants, polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, subsequences, immunogenic fragments, and interspecies homologs of MTB39 and MTB32A. The polynucleotide sequence encoding the individual polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order.
  • In some embodiments, the individual polypeptides of the fusion protein are in order (N— to C— terminus) from large to small. Large antigens are approximately 30 to 150 kD in size, medium antigens are approximately 10 to 30 kD in size, and small antigens are approximately less than 10 kD in size. The sequence encoding the individual polypeptide may be as small as, e.g., an immunogenic fragment such as an individual CTL epitope encoding about 8 to 9 amino acids, or, e.g., an HTL or B cell epitope. The fragment may also include multiple epitopes. The immunogenic fragment may also represent a larger part of the antigen sequence, e.g., about 50% or more of MTB39 and MTB32A, e.g., the N— and C-terminal portions of MTB32A. Preferred immunogenic fragments of MTB32A include Ra12, Ra35, and Ra35 MutSA.
  • A fusion polypeptide of the invention specifically binds to antibodies raised against at least two antigen polypeptides, wherein each antigen polypeptide is selected from the group consisting of MTB39 or an immunogenic portion or fragment thereof and MTB32A or an immunogenic portion thereof. The antibodies can be polyclonal or monoclonal. Optionally, the fusion polypeptide specifically binds to antibodies raised against the fusion junction of the antigens, which antibodies do not bind to the antigens individually, i.e., when they are not part of a fusion protein. The fusion polypeptides optionally comprise additional polypeptides, e.g., three, four, five, six, or more polypeptides, up to about 25 polypeptides, optionally heterologous polypeptides or repeated homologous polypeptides, fused to the at least two heterologous antigens. The additional polypeptides of the fusion protein are optionally derived from Mycobacterium as well as other sources, such as other bacterial, viral, or invertebrate, vertebrate, or mammalian sources. The individual polypeptides of the fusion protein can be in any order. As described herein, the fusion protein can also be linked to other molecules, including additional polypeptides. The compositions of the invention can also comprise additional polypeptides that are unlinked to the fusion proteins of the invention. These additional polypeptides may be heterologous or homologous polypeptides.
  • The term “fused” refers to the covalent linkage between two polypeptides in a fusion protein. The polypeptides are typically joined via a peptide bond, either directly to each other or via an amino acid linker. Optionally, the peptides can be joined via non-peptide covalent linkages known to those of skill in the art.
  • “FL” refers to full-length, i.e., a polypeptide that is the same length as the wild-type polypeptide.
  • The term “immunogenic fragment thereof” refers to a polypeptide comprising an epitope that is recognized by cytotoxic T lymphocytes, helper T lymphocytes or B cells. Preferred immunogenic fragments of, e.g., MTB32A, are RA35, Ra35MutSA, or Ra12.
  • The term “Mycobacterium species of the tuberculosis complex” includes those species traditionally considered as causing the disease tuberculosis, as well as Mycobacterium environmental and opportunistic species that cause tuberculosis and lung disease in immune compromised patients, such as patients with AIDS, e.g., M. tuberculosis, M. bovis, or M. africanum, BCG, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. celatum, M. genavense, M. haemophilum, M. kansasii, M. simiae, M. vaccae, M. fortuitum, and M. scrofulaceum (see, e.g., Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine, volume 1, pp. 1004-1014 and 1019-1023 (14th ed., Fauci et al., eds., 1998).
  • An adjuvant refers to the components in a vaccine or therapeutic composition that increase the specific immune response to the antigen (see, e.g., Edelman, AIDS Res. Hum Retroviruses 8:1409-1411 (1992)). Adjuvants induce immune responses of the Th1-type and Th-2 type response. Th1-type cytokines (e.g., IFN-γ, IL-2, and IL-12) tend to favor the induction of cell-mediated immune response to an administered antigen, while Th-2 type cytokines (e.g., IL-4, IL-5, II-6, IL-10 and TNF-β) tend to favor the induction of humoral immune responses.
  • “Nucleic acid” refers to deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form. The term encompasses nucleic acids containing known nucleotide analogs or modified backbone residues or linkages, which are synthetic, naturally occurring, and non-naturally occurring, which have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid, and which are metabolized in a manner similar to the reference nucleotides. Examples of such analogs include, without limitation, phosphorothioates, phosphoramidates, methyl phosphonates, chiral-methyl phosphonates, 2-O-methyl ribonucleotides, peptide-nucleic acids (PNAs).
  • Unless otherwise indicated, a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences, as well as the sequence explicitly indicated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 (1985); Rossolini et al., Mol. Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)). The term nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, mRNA, oligonucleotide, and polynucleotide.
  • The terms “polypeptide,” “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues. The terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non-naturally occurring amino acid polymer.
  • The term “amino acid” refers to naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids. Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, γ-carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine. Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an a carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid. Amino acid mimetics refers to chemical compounds that have a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
  • Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
  • “Conservatively modified variants” applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, conservatively modified variants refers to those nucleic acids which encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For instance, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide. Such nucleic acid variations are “silent variations,” which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein which encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid. One of skill will recognize that each codon in a nucleic acid (except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan) can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule. Accordingly, each silent variation of a nucleic acid which encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
  • As to amino acid sequences, one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a “conservatively modified variant” where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
  • The following eight groups each contain amino acids that are conservative substitutions for one another:
    • 1) Alanine (A), Glycine (G);
    • 2) Aspartic acid (D), Glutamic acid (E);
    • 3) Asparagine (N), Glutamine (Q);
    • 4) Arginine (R), Lysine (K);
    • 5) Isoleucine (I), Leucine (L), Methionine (M), Valine (V);
    • 6) Phenylalanine (F), Tyrosine (Y), Tryptophan (W);
    • 7) Serine (S), Threonine (T); and
    • 8) Cysteine (C), Methionine (M)
    • (see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins (1984)).
  • The term “heterologous” when used with reference to portions of a nucleic acid indicates that the nucleic acid comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature. For instance, the nucleic acid is typically recombinantly produced, having two or more sequences from unrelated genes arranged to make a new functional nucleic acid, e.g., a promoter from one source and a coding region from another source. Similarly, a heterologous protein indicates that the protein comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature (e.g., a fusion protein).
  • The phrase “selectively (or specifically) hybridizes to” refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent hybridization conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular or library DNA or RNA).
  • The phrase “stringent hybridization conditions” refers to conditions under which a probe will hybridize to its target subsequence, typically in a complex mixture of nucleic acid, but to no other sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures. An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen, Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology—Hybridization with Nucleic Probes, “Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid assays” (1993). Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10° C. lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH. The Tm is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH, and nucleic concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at Tm, 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium). Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1.0 M sodium ion, typically about 0.01 to 1.0 M sodium ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7.0 to 8.3 and the temperature is at least about 30° C. for short probes (e.g., 10 to 50 nucleotides) and at least about 60° C. for long probes (e.g., greater than 50 nucleotides). Stringent conditions may also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide. For selective or specific hybridization, a positive signal is at least two times background, optionally 10 times background hybridization. Exemplary stringent hybridization conditions can be as following: 50% formamide, 5×SSC, and 1% SDS, incubating at 42° C., or, 5×SSC, 1% SDS, incubating at 65° C., with wash in 0.2×SSC, and 0.1% SDS at 65° C.
  • Nucleic acids that do not hybridize to each other under stringent conditions are still substantially identical if the polypeptides which they encode are substantially identical. This occurs, for example, when a copy of a nucleic acid is created using the maximum codon degeneracy permitted by the genetic code. In such cases, the nucleic acids typically hybridize under moderately stringent hybridization conditions. Exemplary “moderately stringent hybridization conditions” include a hybridization in a buffer of 40% formamide, 1 M NaCl, 1% SDS at 37° C., and a wash in 1×SSC at 45° C. A positive hybridization is at least twice background. Those of ordinary skill will readily recognize that alternative hybridization and wash conditions can be utilized to provide conditions of similar stringency.
  • “Antibody” refers to a polypeptide comprising a framework region from an immunoglobulin gene or fragments thereof that specifically binds and recognizes an antigen. The recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon, and mu constant region genes, as well as the myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes. Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda. Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively.
  • An exemplary immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit comprises a tetramer. Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kDa) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kDa). The N— terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition. The terms variable light chain (VL) and variable heavy chain (VH) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
  • Antibodies exist, e.g., as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well-characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases. Thus, for example, pepsin digests an antibody below the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′2, a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to VHC H1 by a disulfide bond. The F(ab)′2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region, thereby converting the F(ab)′2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer. The Fab′ monomer is essentially Fab with part of the hinge region (see Fundamental Immunology (Paul ed., 3d ed. 1993). While various antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically or by using recombinant DNA methodology. Thus, the term antibody, as used herein, also includes antibody fragments either produced by the modification of whole antibodies, or those synthesized de novo using recombinant DNA methodologies (e.g., single chain Fv) or those identified using phage display libraries (see, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554 (1990)).
  • For preparation of monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies, any technique known in the art can be used (see, e.g., Kohler & Milstein, Nature 256:495-497 (1975); Kozbor et al., Immunology Today 4: 72 (1983); Cole et al., pp. 77-96 in Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy (1985)). Techniques for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778) can be adapted to produce antibodies to polypeptides of this invention. Also, transgenic mice, or other organisms such as other mammals, may be used to express humanized antibodies. Alternatively, phage display technology can be used to identify antibodies and heteromeric Fab fragments that specifically bind to selected antigens (see, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554 (1990); Marks et al., Biotechnology 10:779-783 (1992)).
  • The phrase “specifically (or selectively) binds” to an antibody or “specifically (or selectively) immunoreactive with,” when referring to a protein or peptide, refers to a binding reaction that is determinative of the presence of the protein in a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologics. Thus, under designated immunoassay conditions, the specified antibodies bind to a particular protein at least two times the background and do not substantially bind in a significant amount to other proteins present in the sample. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody that is selected for its specificity for a particular protein. For example, polyclonal antibodies raised to fusion proteins can be selected to obtain only those polyclonal antibodies that are specifically immunoreactive with fusion protein and not with individual components of the fusion proteins. This selection may be achieved by subtracting out antibodies that cross-react with the individual antigens. A variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a particular protein. For example, solid-phase ELISA immunoassays are routinely used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a protein (see, e.g., Harlow & Lane, Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual (1988), for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity). Typically a specific or selective reaction will be at least twice background signal or noise and more typically more than 10 to 100 times background.
  • Polynucleotides may comprise a native sequence (i.e., an endogenous sequence that encodes an individual antigen or a portion thereof) or may comprise a variant of such a sequence. Polynucleotide variants may contain one or more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions such that the biological activity of the encoded fusion polypeptide is not diminished, relative to a fusion polypeptide comprising native antigens. Variants preferably exhibit at least about 70% identity, more preferably at least about 80% identity and most preferably at least about 90% identity to a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a native polypeptide or a portion thereof.
  • The terms “identical” or percent “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acids or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that are the same or have a specified percentage of amino acid residues or nucleotides that are the same (i.e., 70% identity, optionally 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, er 95% identity over a specified region), when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window, or designated region as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by manual alignment and visual inspection. Such sequences are then said to be “substantially identical.” This definition also refers to the compliment of a test sequence. Optionally, the identity exists over a region that is at least about 25 to about 50 amino acids or nucleotides in length, or optionally over a region that is 75-100 amino acids or nucleotides in length.
  • For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence, to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequence comparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are entered into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. Default program parameters can be used, or alternative parameters can be designated. The sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identities for the test sequences relative to the reference sequence, based on the program parameters.
  • A “comparison window”, as used herein, includes reference to a segment of any one of the number of contiguous positions selected from the group consisting of from 25 to 500, usually about 50 to about 200, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned. Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison are well-known in the art. Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by manual alignment and visual inspection (see, e.g., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (Ausubel et al., eds. 1995 supplement)).
  • One example of a useful algorithm is PILEUP. PILEUP creates a multiple sequence alignment from a group of related sequences using progressive, pairwise alignments to show relationship and percent sequence identity. It also plots a tree or dendogram showing the clustering relationships used to create the alignment. PILEUP uses a simplification of the progressive alignment method of Feng & Doolittle, J. Mol. Evol. 35:351-360 (1987). The method used is similar to the method described by Higgins & Sharp, CABIOS 5:151-153 (1989). The program can align up to 300 sequences, each of a maximum length of 5,000 nucleotides or amino acids. The multiple alignment procedure begins with the pairwise alignment of the two most similar sequences, producing a cluster of two aligned sequences. This cluster is then aligned to the next most related sequence or cluster of aligned sequences. Two clusters of sequences are aligned by a simple extension of the pairwise alignment of two individual sequences. The final alignment is achieved by a series of progressive, pairwise alignments. The program is run by designating specific sequences and their amino acid or nucleotide coordinates for regions of sequence comparison and by designating the program parameters. Using PILEUP, a reference sequence is compared to other test sequences to determine the percent sequence identity relationship using the following parameters: default gap weight (3.00), default gap length weight (0.10), and weighted end gaps. PILEUP can be obtained from the GCG sequence analysis software package, e.g., version 7.0 (Devereaux et al., Nuc. Acids Res. 12:387-395 (1984).
  • Another example of algorithm that is suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al., Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 (1977) and Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990), respectively. Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/). This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence. T is referred to as the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al., supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always>0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always<0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached. The BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment. The BLASTN program (for nucleotide sequences) uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 11, an expectation (E) or 10, M=5, N=−4 and a comparison of both strands. For amino acid sequences, the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength of 3, and expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff & Henikoff, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:10915 (1989)) alignments (B) of 50, expectation (E) of 10, M=5, N=−4, and a comparison of both strands.
  • The BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin & Altschul, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787 (1993)). One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance. For example, a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.2, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
  • Polynucleotide Compositions
  • As used herein, the terms “DNA segment” and “polynucleotide” refer to a DNA molecule that has been isolated free of total genomic DNA of a particular species. Therefore, a DNA segment encoding a polypeptide refers to a DNA segment that contains one or more coding sequences yet is substantially isolated away from, or purified free from, total genomic DNA of the species from which the DNA segment is obtained. Included within the terms “DNA segment” and “polynucleotide” are DNA segments and smaller fragments of such segments, and also recombinant vectors, including, for example, plasmids, cosmids, phagemids, phage, viruses, and the like.
  • As will be understood by those skilled in the art, the DNA segments of this invention can include genomic sequences, extra-genomic and plasmid-encoded sequences and smaller engineered gene segments that express, or may be adapted to express, proteins, polypeptides, peptides and the like. Such segments may be naturally isolated, or modified synthetically by the hand of man.
  • The terms “isolated,” “purified,” or “biologically pure” therefore refer to material that is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany it as found in its native state. Of course, this refers to the DNA segment as originally isolated, and does not exclude other isolated proteins, genes, or coding regions later added to the composition by the hand of man. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. An isolated nucleic acid is separated from other open reading frames that flank the gene and encode proteins other than the gene.
  • As will be recognized by the skilled artisan, polynucleotides may be single-stranded (coding or antisense) or double-stranded, and may be DNA (genomic, cDNA or synthetic) or RNA molecules. RNA molecules include HnRNA molecules, which contain introns and correspond to a DNA molecule in a one-to-one manner, and mRNA molecules, which do not contain introns. Additional coding or non-coding sequences may, but need not, be present within a polynucleotide of the present invention, and a polynucleotide may, but need not, be linked to other molecules and/or support materials.
  • Polynucleotides may comprise a native sequence (i.e., an endogenous sequence that encodes a Mycobacterium antigen or a portion thereof) or may comprise a variant, or a biological or antigenic functional equivalent of such a sequence. Polynucleotide variants may contain one or more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions, as further described below, preferably such that the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide is not diminished, relative to a native tumor protein. The effect on the immunogenicity of the encoded polypeptide may generally be assessed as described herein. The term “variants” also encompasses homologous genes of xenogenic origin.
  • In additional embodiments, the present invention provides isolated polynucleotides and polypeptides comprising various lengths of contiguous stretches of sequence identical to or complementary to one or more of the sequences disclosed herein. For example, polynucleotides are provided by this invention that comprise at least about 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500 or 1000 or more contiguous nucleotides of one or more of the sequences disclosed herein as well as all intermediate lengths there between. It will be readily understood that “intermediate lengths”, in this context, means any length between the quoted values, such as 16, 17, 18, 19, etc.; 21, 22, 23, etc.; 30, 31, 32, etc.; 50, 51, 52, 53, etc.; 100, 101, 102, 103, etc.;150, 151, 152, 153, etc.; including all integers through 200-500; 500-1,000, and the like.
  • The polynucleotides of the present invention, or fragments thereof, regardless of the length of the coding sequence itself, may be combined with other DNA sequences, such as promoters, polyadenylation signals, additional restriction enzyme sites, multiple cloning sites, other coding segments, and the like, such that their overall length may vary considerably. It is therefore contemplated that a nucleic acid fragment of almost any length may be employed, with the total length preferably being limited by the ease of preparation and use in the intended recombinant DNA protocol. For example, illustrative DNA segments with total lengths of about 10,000, about 5000, about 3000, about 2,000, about 1,000, about 500, about 200, about 100, about 50 base pairs in length, and the like, (including all intermediate lengths) are contemplated to be useful in many implementations of this invention.
  • Moreover, it will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that, as a result of the degeneracy of the genetic code, there are many nucleotide sequences that encode a polypeptide as described herein. Some of these polynucleotides bear minimal homology to the nucleotide sequence of any native gene. Nonetheless, polynucleotides that vary due to differences in codon usage are specifically contemplated by the present invention, for example polynucleotides that are optimized for human and/or primate codon selection. Further, alleles of the genes comprising the polynucleotide sequences provided herein are within the scope of the present invention. Alleles are endogenous genes that are altered as a result of one or more mutations, such as deletions, additions and/or substitutions of nucleotides. The resulting mRNA and protein may, but need not, have an altered structure or function. Alleles may be identified using standard techniques (such as hybridization, amplification and/or database sequence comparison).
  • Polynucleotide Identification and Characterization
  • Polynucleotides may be identified, prepared and/or manipulated using any of a variety of well established techniques. For example, a polynucleotide may be identified, as described in more detail below, by screening a microarray of cDNAs for tumor-associated expression (i.e., expression that is at least two fold greater in a tumor than in normal tissue, as determined using a representative assay provided herein). Such screens may be performed, for example, using a Synteni microarray (Palo Alto, Calif.) according to the manufacturer's instructions (and essentially as described by Schena et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:10614-10619 (1996) and Heller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:2150-2155 (1997)). Alternatively, polynucleotides may be amplified from cDNA prepared from cells expressing the proteins described herein, such as M. tuberculosis cells. Such polynucleotides may be amplified via polymerase chain reaction (PCR). For this approach, sequence-specific primers may be designed based on the sequences provided herein, and may be purchased or synthesized.
  • An amplified portion of a polynucleotide of the present invention may be used to isolate a full length gene from a suitable library (e.g., a M. tuberculosis cDNA library) using well known techniques. Within such techniques, a library (cDNA or genomic) is screened using one or more polynucleotide probes or primers suitable for amplification. Preferably, a library is size-selected to include larger molecules. Random primed libraries may also be preferred for identifying 5′ and upstream regions of genes. Genomic libraries are preferred for obtaining introns and extending 5′ sequences.
  • For hybridization techniques, a partial sequence may be labeled (e.g., by nick-translation or end-labeling with 32p) using well known techniques. A bacterial or bacteriophage library is then generally screened by hybridizing filters containing denatured bacterial colonies (or lawns containing phage plaques) with the labeled probe (see Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (1989)). Hybridizing colonies or plaques are selected and expanded, and the DNA is isolated for further analysis. cDNA clones may be analyzed to determine the amount of additional sequence by, for example, PCR using a primer from the partial sequence and a primer from the vector. Restriction maps and partial sequences may be generated to identify one or more overlapping clones. The complete sequence may then be determined using standard techniques, which may involve generating a series of deletion clones. The resulting overlapping sequences can then assembled into a single contiguous sequence. A full length cDNA molecule can be generated by ligating suitable fragments, using well known techniques.
  • Alternatively, there are numerous amplification techniques for obtaining a full length coding sequence from a partial cDNA sequence. Within such techniques, amplification is generally performed via PCR. Any of a variety of commercially available kits may be used to perform the amplification step. Primers may be designed using, for example, software well known in the art. Primers are preferably 22-30 nucleotides in length, have a GC content of at least 50% and anneal to the target sequence at temperatures of about 68° C. to 72° C. The amplified region may be sequenced as described above, and overlapping sequences assembled into a contiguous sequence.
  • One such amplification technique is inverse PCR (see Triglia et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 16:8186 (1988)), which uses restriction enzymes to generate a fragment in the known region of the gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a template for PCR with divergent primers derived from the known region. Within an alternative approach, sequences adjacent to a partial sequence may be retrieved by amplification with a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to a known region. The amplified sequences are typically subjected to a second round of amplification with the same linker primer and a second primer specific to the known region. A variation on this procedure, which employs two primers that initiate extension in opposite directions from the known sequence, is described in WO 96/38591. Another such technique is known as “rapid amplification of cDNA ends” or RACE. This technique involves the use of an internal primer and an external primer, which hybridizes to a polyA region or vector sequence, to identify sequences that are 5′ and 3′ of a known sequence. Additional techniques include capture PCR (Lagerstrom et al., PCR Methods Applic. 1:11 1-19 (1991)) and walking PCR (Parker et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 19:3055-60 (1991)). Other methods employing amplification may also be employed to obtain a full length cDNA sequence.
  • In certain instances, it is possible to obtain a full length cDNA sequence by analysis of sequences provided in an expressed sequence tag (EST) database, such as that available from GenBank. Searches for overlapping ESTs may generally be performed using well known programs (e.g., NCBI BLAST searches), and such ESTs may be used to generate a contiguous full length sequence. Full length DNA sequences may also be obtained by analysis of genomic fragments.
  • Polynucleotide Expression in Host Cells
  • In other embodiments of the invention, polynucleotide sequences or fragments thereof which encode polypeptides of the invention, or fusion proteins or functional equivalents thereof, may be used in recombinant DNA molecules to direct expression of a polypeptide in appropriate host cells. Due to the inherent degeneracy of the genetic code, other DNA sequences that encode substantially the same or a functionally equivalent amino acid sequence may be produced and these sequences may be used to clone and express a given polypeptide.
  • As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be advantageous in some instances to produce polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons. For example, codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce a recombinant RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
  • Moreover, the polynucleotide sequences of the present invention can be engineered using methods generally known in the art in order to alter polypeptide encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the gene product. For example, DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides may be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences. In addition, site-directed mutagenesis may be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, or introduce mutations, and so forth.
  • In another embodiment of the invention, natural, modified, or recombinant nucleic acid sequences may be ligated to a heterologous sequence to encode a fusion protein. For example, to screen peptide libraries for inhibitors of polypeptide activity, it may be useful to encode a chimeric protein that can be recognized by a commercially available antibody. A fusion protein may also be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the polypeptide may be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
  • Sequences encoding a desired polypeptide may be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers, M. H. et al., Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. pp. 215-223 (1980), Horn et al., Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. pp. 225-232 (1980)). Alternatively, the protein itself may be produced using chemical methods to synthesize the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or a portion thereof. For example, peptide synthesis can be performed using various solid-phase techniques (Roberge et al., Science 269:202-204 (1995)) and automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using the ABI 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer, Palo Alto, Calif.).
  • A newly synthesized peptide may be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, Proteins, Structures and Molecular Principles (1983)) or other comparable techniques available in the art. The composition of the synthetic peptides may be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure). Additionally, the amino acid sequence of a polypeptide, or any part thereof, may be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins, or any part thereof, to produce a variant polypeptide.
  • In order to express a desired polypeptide, the nucleotide sequences encoding the polypeptide, or functional equivalents, may be inserted into appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art may be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (1989), and Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (1989).
  • A variety of expression vector/host systems may be utilized to contain and express polynucleotide sequences. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors; insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus); plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids); or animal cell systems.
  • The “control elements” or “regulatory sequences” present in an expression vector are those non-translated regions of the vector—enhancers, promoters, 5′ and 3′ untranslated regions—which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements may vary in their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, may be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the PBLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) or PSPORT1 plasmid (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) and the like may be used. In mammalian cell systems, promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are generally preferred. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of the sequence encoding a polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV may be advantageously used with an appropriate selectable marker.
  • In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be selected depending upon the use intended for the expressed polypeptide. For example, when large quantities are needed, for example for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, the multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the sequence encoding the polypeptide of interest may be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of β-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; pIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 264:5503-5509 (1989)); and the like. pGEX Vectors (Promega, Madison, Wis.) may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. Proteins made in such systems may be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor XA protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.
  • In the yeast, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH may be used. For reviews, see Ausubel et al. (supra) and Grant et al., Methods Enzymol. 153:516-544 (1987).
  • In cases where plant expression vectors are used, the expression of sequences encoding polypeptides may be driven by any of a number of promoters. For example, viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV may be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu, EMBO J. 6:307-311 (1987)). Alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters may be used (Coruzzi et al., EMBO J. 3:1671-1680 (1984); Broglie et al., Science 224:838-843 (1984); and Winter et al., Results Probl. Cell Differ. 17:85-105 (1991)). These constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or pathogen-mediated transfection. Such techniques are described in a number of generally available reviews (see, e.g., Hobbs in McGraw Hill Yearbook of Science and Technology pp. 191-196 (1992)).
  • An insect system may also be used to express a polypeptide of interest. For example, in one such system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. The sequences encoding the polypeptide may be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of the polypeptide-encoding sequence will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein. The recombinant viruses may then be used to infect, for example, S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which the polypeptide of interest may be expressed (Engelhard et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91 :3224-3227 (1994)).
  • In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems are generally available. For example, in cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest may be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential E1 or E3 region of the viral genome may be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing the polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:3655-3659 (1984)). In addition, transcription enhancers, such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, may be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
  • Specific initiation signals may also be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding the polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a portion thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals including the ATG initiation codon should be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon should be in the correct reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons may be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used, such as those described in the literature (Scharf. et al., Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20:125-162 (1994)).
  • In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not-limited to, acetylation, carboxylation. glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing which cleaves a “prepro” form of the protein may also be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function. Different host cells such as CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and W138, which have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational activities, may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein.
  • For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is generally preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express a polynucleotide of interest may be transformed using expression vectors which may contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media before they are switched to selective media. The purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells which successfully express the introduced sequences. Resistant clones of stably transformed cells may be proliferated using tissue culture techniques appropriate to the cell type.
  • Any number of selection systems may be used to recover transformed cell lines. These include, but are not limited to, the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11:223-32 (1977)) and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817-23 (1990)) genes which can be employed in tk.sup.- or aprt.sup.-cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection; for example, dhfr which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:3567-70 (1980)); npt, which confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al., J. Mol. Biol. 150:1-14 (1981)); and als or pat, which confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murry, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described, for example, trpB, which allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:8047-51 (1988)). Recently, the use of visible markers has gained popularity with such markers as anthocyanins, β-glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its substrate luciferin, being widely used not only to identify transformants, but also to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes et al., Methods Mol. Biol. 55:121-131 (1995)).
  • Although the presence/absence of marker gene expression suggests that the gene of interest is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if the sequence encoding a polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, recombinant cells containing sequences can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a polypeptide-encoding sequence under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the tandem gene as well.
  • Alternatively, host cells which contain and express a desired polynucleotide sequence may be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques which include membrane, solution, or chip based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein.
  • A variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of polynucleotide-encoded products, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the product are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). A two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay utilizing monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a given polypeptide may be preferred for some applications, but a competitive binding assay may also be employed. These and other assays are described, among other places, in Hampton et al., Serological Methods, a Laboratory Manual (1990) and Maddox et al., J. Exp. Med. 158:1211-1216 (1983).
  • A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those skilled in the art and may be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid assays. Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide. Alternatively, the sequences, or any portions thereof may be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and may be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6 and labeled nucleotides. These procedures may be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits. Suitable reporter molecules or labels, which may be used include radionuclides, enzymes, fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
  • Host cells transformed with a polynucleotide sequence of interest may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture. The protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used: As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides of the invention may be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of the encoded polypeptide through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane. Other recombinant constructions may be used to join sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest to nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will facilitate purification of soluble proteins. Such purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system (Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.). The inclusion of cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor XA or enterokinase (Invitrogen. San Diego, Calif.) between the purification domain and the encoded polypeptide may be used to facilitate purification. One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a polypeptide of interest and a nucleic acid encoding 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site. The histidine residues facilitate purification on IMIAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography) as described in Porath et al., Prot. Exp. Purif. 3:263-281 (1992) while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the desired polypeptide from the fusion protein. A discussion of vectors which contain fusion proteins is provided in Kroll et al., DNA Cell Biol. 12:441-453 (1993)).
  • In addition to recombinant production methods, polypeptides of the invention, and fragments thereof, may be produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154 (1963)). Protein synthesis may be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Alternatively, various fragments may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical methods to produce the full length molecule.
  • In Vivo Polynucleotide Delivery Techniques
  • In additional embodiments, genetic constructs comprising one or more of the polynucleotides of the invention are introduced into cells in vivo. This may be achieved using any of a variety or well known approaches, several of which are outlined below for the purpose of illustration.
  • 1. Adenovirus
  • One of the preferred methods for in vivo delivery of one or more nucleic acid sequences involves the use of an adenovirus expression vector. “Adenovirus expression vector” is meant to include those constructs containing adenovirus sequences sufficient to (a) support packaging of the construct and (b) to express a polynucleotide that has been cloned therein in a sense or antisense orientation. Of course, in the context of an antisense construct, expression does not require that the gene product be synthesized.
  • The expression vector comprises a genetically engineered form of an adenovirus. Knowledge of the genetic organization of adenovirus, a 36 kb, linear, double-stranded DNA virus, allows substitution of large pieces of adenoviral DNA with foreign sequences up to 7 kb (Grunhaus & Horwitz, 1992). In contrast to retrovirus, the adenoviral infection of host cells does not result in chromosomal integration because adenoviral DNA can replicate in an episomal manner without potential genotoxicity. Also, adenoviruses are structurally stable, and no genome rearrangement has been detected after extensive amplification. Adenovirus can infect virtually all epithelial cells regardless of their cell cycle stage. So far, adenoviral infection appears to be linked only to mild disease such as acute respiratory disease in humans.
  • Adenovirus is particularly suitable for use as a gene transfer vector because of its mid-sized genome, ease of manipulation, high titer, wide target-cell range and high infectivity. Both ends of the viral genome contain 100-200 base pair inverted repeats (ITRs), which are cis elements necessary for viral DNA replication and packaging. The early (E) and late (L) regions of the genome contain different transcription units that are divided by the onset of viral DNA replication. The E1 region (E1A and E1B) encodes proteins responsible for the regulation of transcription of the viral genome and a few cellular genes. The expression of the E2 region (E2A and E2B) results in the synthesis of the proteins for viral DNA replication. These proteins are involved in DNA replication, late gene expression and host cell shut-off (Renan, 1990). The products of the late genes, including the majority of the viral capsid proteins, are expressed only after significant processing of a single primary transcript issued by the major late promoter (MLP). The MLP, (located at 16.8 m.u.) is particularly efficient during the late phase of infection, and all the mRNA's issued from this promoter possess a 5′-tripartite leader (TPL) sequence which makes them preferred mRNA's for translation.
  • In a current system, recombinant adenovirus is generated from homologous recombination between shuttle vector and provirus vector. Due to the possible recombination between two proviral vectors, wild-type adenovirus may be generated from this process. Therefore, it is critical to isolate a single clone of virus from an individual plaque and examine its genomic structure.
  • Generation and propagation of the current adenovirus vectors, which are replication deficient, depend on a unique helper cell line, designated 293, which was transformed from human embryonic kidney cells by Ad5 DNA fragments and constitutively expresses E1 proteins (Graham et al., 1977). Since the E3 region is dispensable from the adenovirus genome (Jones & Shenk, 1978), the current adenovirus vectors, with the help of 293 cells, carry foreign DNA in either the E1, the D3 or both regions (Graham & Prevec, 1991). In nature, adenovirus can package approximately 105% of the wild-type genome (Ghosh-Choudhury et al., 1987), providing capacity for about 2 extra kB of DNA. Combined with the approximately 5.5 kB of DNA that is replaceable in the E1 and E3 regions, the maximum capacity of the current adenovirus vector is under 7.5 kB, or about 15% of the total length of the vector. More than 80% of the adenovirus viral genome remains in the vector backbone and is the source of vector-borne cytotoxicity. Also, the replication deficiency of the E1-deleted virus is incomplete. For example, leakage of viral gene expression has been observed with the currently available vectors at high multiplicities of infection (MOI) (Mulligan, 1993).
  • Helper cell lines may be derived from human cells such as human embryonic kidney cells, muscle cells, hematopoietic cells or other human embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. Alternatively, the helper cells may be derived from the cells of other mammalian species that are permissive for human adenovirus. Such cells include, e.g., Vero cells or other monkey embryonic mesenchymal or epithelial cells. As stated above, the currently preferred helper cell line is 293.
  • Recently, Racher et al. (1995) disclosed improved methods for culturing 293 cells and propagating adenovirus. In one format, natural cell aggregates are grown by inoculating individual cells into 1 liter siliconized spinner flasks (Techne, Cambridge, UK) containing 100-200 ml of medium. Following stirring at 40 rpm, the cell viability is estimated with trypan blue. In another format, Fibra-Cel microcarriers (Bibby Sterlin, Stone, UK) (5 g/l) is employed as follows. A cell inoculum, resuspended in 5 ml of medium, is added to the carrier (50 ml) in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask and left stationary, with occasional agitation, for 1 to 4 h. The medium is then replaced with 50 ml of fresh medium and shaking initiated. For virus production, cells are allowed to grow to about 80% confluence, after which time the medium is replaced (to 25% of the final volume) and adenovirus added at an MOI of 0.05. Cultures are left stationary overnight, following which the volume is increased to 100% and shaking commenced for another 72 h.
  • Other than the requirement that the adenovirus vector be replication defective, or at least conditionally defective, the nature of the adenovirus vector is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice of the invention. The adenovirus may be of any of the 42 different known serotypes or subgroups A-F. Adenovirus type 5 of subgroup C is the preferred starting material in order to obtain a conditional replication-defective adenovirus vector for use in the present invention, since Adenovirus type 5 is a human adenovirus about which a great deal of biochemical and genetic information is known, and it has historically been used for most constructions employing adenovirus as a vector.
  • As stated above, the typical vector according to the present invention is replication defective and will not have an adenovirus E1 region. Thus, it will be most convenient to introduce the polynucleotide encoding the gene of interest at the position from which the E1-coding sequences have been removed. However, the position of insertion of the construct within the adenovirus sequences is not critical to the invention. The polynucleotide encoding the gene of interest may also be inserted in lieu of the deleted E3 region in E3 replacement vectors as described by Karlsson et al. (1986) or in the E4 region where a helper cell line or helper virus complements the E4 defect.
  • Adenovirus is easy to grow and manipulate and exhibits broad host range in vitro and in vivo. This group of viruses can be obtained in high titers, e.g., 109-1011 plaque-forming units per ml, and they are highly infective. The life cycle of adenovirus does not require integration into the host cell genome. The foreign genes delivered by adenovirus vectors are episomal and, therefore, have low genotoxicity to host cells. No side effects have been reported in studies of vaccination with wild-type adenovirus (Couch et al., 1963; Top et al., 1971), demonstrating their safety and therapeutic potential as in vivo gene transfer vectors.
  • Adenovirus vectors have been used in eukaryotic gene expression (Levrero et al., 1991; Gomez-Foix et al., 1992) and vaccine development (Grunhaus & Horwitz, 1992; Graham & Prevec, 1992). Recently, animal studies suggested that recombinant adenovirus could be used for gene therapy (Stratford-Perricaudet & Perricaudet, 1991; Stratford-Perricaudet et al., 1990; Rich et al., 1993). Studies in administering recombinant adenovirus to different tissues include trachea instillation (Rosenfeld et al., 1991; Rosenfeld et al., 1992), muscle injection (Ragot et al., 1993), peripheral intravenous injections (Herz & Gerard, 1993) and stereotactic inoculation into the brain (Le Gal La Salle et al., 1993).
  • 2. Retroviruses
  • The retroviruses are a group of single-stranded RNA viruses characterized by an ability to convert their RNA to double-stranded DNA in infected cells by a process of reverse-transcription (Coffin, 1990). The resulting DNA then stably integrates into cellular chromosomes as a provirus and directs synthesis of viral proteins. The integration results in the retention of the viral gene sequences in the recipient cell and its descendants. The retroviral genome contains three genes, gag, pol, and env that code for capsid proteins, polymerase enzyme, and envelope components, respectively. A sequence found upstream from the gag gene contains a signal for packaging of the genome into virions. Two long terminal repeat (LTR) sequences are present at the 5′ and 3′ ends of the viral genome. These contain strong promoter and enhancer sequences and are also required for integration in the host cell genome (Coffin, 1990).
  • In order to construct a retroviral vector, a nucleic acid encoding one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of interest is inserted into the viral genome in the place of certain viral sequences to produce a virus that is replication-defective. In order to produce virions, a packaging cell line containing the gag, pol, and env genes but without the LTR and packaging components is constructed (Mann et al., 1983). When a recombinant plasmid containing a cDNA, together with the retroviral LTR and packaging sequences is introduced into this cell line (by calcium phosphate precipitation for example), the packaging sequence allows the RNA transcript of the recombinant plasmid to be packaged into viral particles, which are then secreted into the culture media (Nicolas & Rubenstein, 1988; Temin, 1986; Mann et al., 1983). The media containing the recombinant retroviruses is then collected, optionally concentrated, and used for gene transfer. Retroviral vectors are able to infect a broad variety of cell types. However, integration and stable expression require the division of host cells (Paskind et al., 1975).
  • A novel approach designed to allow specific targeting of retrovirus vectors was recently developed based on the chemical modification of a retrovirus by the chemical addition of lactose residues to the viral envelope. This modification could permit the specific infection of hepatocytes via sialoglycoprotein receptors.
  • A different approach to targeting of recombinant retroviruses was designed in which biotinylated antibodies against a retroviral envelope protein and against a specific cell receptor were used. The antibodies were coupled via the biotin components by using streptavidin (Roux et al., 1989). Using antibodies against major histocompatibility complex class I and class II antigens, they demonstrated the infection of a variety of human cells that bore those surface antigens with an ecotropic virus in vitro (Roux et al., 1989).
  • 3. Adeno-Associated Viruses
  • AAV (Ridgeway, 1988; Hermonat & Muzycska, 1984) is a parovirus, discovered as a contamination of adenoviral stocks. It is a ubiquitous virus (antibodies are present in 85% of the US human population) that has not been linked to any disease. It is also classified as a dependovirus, because its replications is dependent on the presence of a helper virus, such as adenovirus. Five serotypes have been isolated, of which AAV-2 is the best characterized. AAV has a single-stranded linear DNA that is encapsidated into capsid proteins VP1, VP2 and VP3 to form an icosahedral virion of 20 to 24 nm in diameter (Muzyczka & McLaughlin, 1988).
  • The AAV DNA is approximately 4.7 kilobases long. It contains two open reading frames and is flanked by two ITRs. There are two major genes in the AAV genome: rep and cap. The rep gene codes for proteins responsible for viral replications, whereas cap codes for capsid protein VP1-3. Each ITR forms a T-shaped hairpin structure. These terminal repeats are the only essential cis components of the AAV for chromosomal integration. Therefore, the AAV can be used as a vector with all viral coding sequences removed and replaced by the cassette of genes for delivery. Three viral promoters have been identified and named p5, p19, and p40, according to their map position. Transcription from p5 and p19 results in production of rep proteins, and transcription from p40 produces the capsid proteins (Hermonat & Muzyczka, 1984).
  • There are several factors that prompted researchers to study the possibility of using rAAV as an expression vector One is that the requirements for delivering a gene to integrate into the host chromosome are surprisingly few. It is necessary to have the 145-bp ITRs, which are only 6% of the AAV genome. This leaves room in the vector to assemble a 4.5-kb DNA insertion. While this carrying capacity may prevent the AAV from delivering large genes, it is amply suited for delivering the antisense constructs of the present invention.
  • AAV is also a good choice of delivery vehicles due to its safety. There is a relatively complicated rescue mechanism: not only wild type adenovirus but also AAV genes are required to mobilize rAAV. Likewise, AAV is not pathogenic and not associated with any disease. The removal of viral coding sequences minimizes immune reactions to viral gene expression, and therefore, rAAV does not evoke an inflammatory response.
  • 4. Other Viral Vectors as Expression Constructs
  • Other viral vectors may be employed as expression constructs in the present invention for the delivery of oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences to a host cell. Vectors derived from viruses such as vaccinia virus (Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988), lentiviruses, polio viruses and herpes viruses may be employed. They offer several attractive features for various mammalian cells (Friedmann, 1989; Ridgeway, 1988; Coupar et al., 1988; Horwich et al., 1990).
  • With the recent recognition of defective hepatitis B viruses, new insight was gained into the structure-function relationship of different viral sequences. In vitro studies showed that the virus could retain the ability for helper-dependent packaging and reverse transcription despite the deletion of up to 80% of its genome (Horwich et al., 1990). This suggested that large portions of the genome could be replaced with foreign genetic material. The hepatotropism and persistence (integration) were particularly attractive properties for liver-directed gene transfer. Chang et al. (1991) introduced the chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) gene into duck hepatitis B virus genome in the place of the polymerase, surface, and pre-surface coding sequences. It was cotransfected with wild-type virus into an avian hepatoma cell line. Culture media containing high titers of the recombinant virus were used to infect primary duckling hepatocytes. Stable CAT gene expression was detected for at least 24 days after transfection (Chang et al., 1991).
  • 5. Non-Viral Vectors
  • In order to effect expression of the oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences of the present invention, the expression construct must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cells lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the treatment of certain disease states. As described above, one preferred mechanism for delivery is via viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle.
  • Once the expression construct has been delivered into the cell the nucleic acid encoding the desired oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may be positioned and expressed at different sites. In certain embodiments, the nucleic acid encoding the construct may be stably integrated into the genome of the cell. This integration may be in the specific location and orientation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non-specific location (gene augmentation). In yet further embodiments, the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or “episomes” encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle. How the expression construct is delivered to a cell and where in the cell the nucleic acid remains is dependent on the type of expression construct employed.
  • In certain embodiments of the invention, the expression construct comprising one or more oligonucleotide or polynucleotide sequences may simply consist of naked recombinant DNA or plasmids. Transfer of the construct may be performed by any of the methods mentioned above which physically or chemically permeabilize the cell membrane. This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo use as well. Dubensky et al. (1984) successfully injected polyomavirus DNA in the form of calcium phosphate precipitates into liver and spleen of adult and newborn mice demonstrating active viral replication and acute infection. Benvenisty & Reshef (1986) also demonstrated that direct intraperitoneal injection of calcium phosphate-precipitated plasmids results in expression of the transfected genes. It is envisioned that DNA encoding a gene of interest may also be transferred in a similar manner in vivo and express the gene product.
  • Another embodiment of the invention for transferring a naked DNA expression construct into cells may involve particle bombardment. This method depends on the ability to accelerate DNA-coated microprojectiles to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them (Klein et al., 1987). Several devices for accelerating small particles have been developed. One such device relies on a high voltage discharge to generate an electrical current, which in turn provides the motive force (Yang et al., 1990). The microprojectiles used have consisted of biologically inert substances such as tungsten or gold beads.
  • Selected organs including the liver, skin, and muscle tissue of rats and mice have been bombarded in vivo (Yang et al., 1990; Zelenin et al., 1991). This may require surgical exposure of the tissue or cells, to eliminate any intervening tissue between the gun and the target organ, i.e., ex vivo treatment. Again, DNA encoding a particular gene may be delivered via this method and still be incorporated by the present invention.
  • Polypeptide Compositions
  • The present invention, in other aspects, provides polypeptide compositions. Generally, a polypeptide of the invention will be an isolated polypeptide (or an epitope, variant, or active fragment thereof) derived from a mammalian species. Preferably, the polypeptide is encoded by a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein or a sequence which hybridizes under moderately stringent conditions to a polynucleotide sequence disclosed herein. Alternatively, the polypeptide may be defined as a polypeptide which comprises a contiguous amino acid sequence from an amino acid sequence disclosed herein, or which polypeptide comprises an entire amino acid sequence disclosed herein.
  • Immunogenic portions may generally be identified using well known techniques, such as those summarized in Paul, Fundamental Immunology, 3rd ed., 243-247 (1993) and references cited therein. Such techniques include screening polypeptides for the ability to react with antigen-specific antibodies, antisera and/or T-cell lines or clones. As used herein, antisera and antibodies are “antigen-specific” if they specifically bind to an antigen (i.e., they react with the protein in an ELISA or other immunoassay, and do not react detectably with unrelated proteins). Such antisera and antibodies may be prepared as described herein, and using well known techniques. An immunogenic portion of a Mycobacterium sp. protein is a portion that reacts with such antisera and/or T-cells at a level that is not substantially less than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide (e.g., in an ELISA and/or T-cell reactivity assay). Such immunogenic portions may react within such assays at a level that is similar to or greater than the reactivity of the full length polypeptide. Such screens may generally be performed using methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as those described in Harlow & Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual (1988). For example, a polypeptide may be immobilized on a solid support and contacted with patient sera to allow binding of antibodies within the sera to the immobilized polypeptide. Unbound sera may then be removed and bound antibodies detected using, for example, 125I-labeled Protein A.
  • Polypeptides may be prepared using any of a variety of well known techniques. Recombinant polypeptides encoded by DNA sequences as described above may be readily prepared from the DNA sequences using any of a variety of expression vectors known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Expression may be achieved in any appropriate host cell that has been transformed or transfected with an expression vector containing a DNA molecule that encodes a recombinant polypeptide. Suitable host cells include prokaryotes, yeast, and higher eukaryotic cells, such as mammalian cells and plant cells. Preferably, the host cells employed are E. coli, yeast or a mammalian cell line such as COS or CHO. Supernatants from suitable host/vector systems which secrete recombinant protein or polypeptide into culture media may be first concentrated using a commercially available filter. Following concentration, the concentrate may be applied to a suitable purification matrix such as an affinity matrix or an ion exchange resin. Finally, one or more reverse phase HPLC steps can be employed to further purify a recombinant polypeptide.
  • Polypeptides of the invention, immunogenic fragments thereof, and other variants having less than about 100 amino acids, and generally less than about 50 amino acids, may also be generated by synthetic means, using techniques well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For example, such polypeptides may be synthesized using any of the commercially available solid-phase techniques, such as the Merrifield solid-phase synthesis method, where amino acids are sequentially added to a growing amino acid chain. See Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2146 (1963). Equipment for automated synthesis of polypeptides is commercially available from suppliers such as Perkin Elmer/Applied BioSystems Division (Foster City, Calif.), and may be operated according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Within certain specific embodiments, a polypeptide may be a fusion protein that comprises multiple polypeptides as described herein, or that comprises at least one polypeptide as described herein and an unrelated sequence, such as a known tumor protein. A fusion partner may, for example, assist in providing T helper epitopes (an immunological fusion partner), preferably T helper epitopes recognized by humans, or may assist in expressing the protein (an expression enhancer) at higher yields than the native recombinant protein. Certain preferred fusion partners are both immunological and expression enhancing fusion partners. Other fusion partners may be selected so as to increase the solubility of the protein or to enable the protein to be targeted to desired intracellular compartments. Still further fusion partners include affinity tags, which facilitate purification of the protein.
  • Fusion proteins may generally be prepared using standard techniques, including chemical conjugation. Preferably, a fusion protein is expressed as a recombinant protein, allowing the production of increased levels, relative to a non-fused protein, in an expression system. Briefly, DNA sequences encoding the polypeptide components may be assembled separately, and ligated into an appropriate expression vector. The 3′ end of the DNA sequence encoding one polypeptide component is ligated, with or without a peptide linker, to the 5′ end of a DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide component so that the reading frames of the sequences are in phase. This permits translation into a single fusion protein that retains the biological activity of both component polypeptides.
  • A peptide linker sequence may be employed to separate the first and second polypeptide components by a distance sufficient to ensure that each polypeptide folds into its secondary and tertiary structures. Such a peptide linker sequence is incorporated into the fusion protein using standard techniques well known in the art. Suitable peptide linker sequences may be chosen based on the following factors: (1) their ability to adopt a flexible extended conformation; (2) their inability to adopt a secondary structure that could interact with functional epitopes on the first and second polypeptides; and (3) the lack of hydrophobic or charged residues that might react with the polypeptide functional epitopes. Preferred peptide linker sequences contain Gly, Asn and Ser residues. Other near neutral amino acids, such as Thr and Ala may also be used in the linker sequence. Amino acid sequences which may be usefully employed as linkers include those disclosed in Maratea et al., Gene 40:39-46 (1985); Murphy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 83:8258-8262 (1986); U.S. Pat. No. 4,935,233 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,751,180. The linker sequence may generally be from 1 to about 50 amino acids in length. Linker sequences are not required when the first and second polypeptides have non-essential N-terminal amino acid regions that can be used to separate the functional domains and prevent steric interference.
  • The ligated DNA sequences are operably linked to suitable transcriptional or translational regulatory elements. The regulatory elements responsible for expression of DNA are located only 5′ to the DNA sequence encoding the first polypeptides. Similarly, stop codons required to end translation and transcription termination signals are only present 3′ to the DNA sequence encoding the second polypeptide.
  • Fusion proteins are also provided. Such proteins comprise a polypeptide as described herein together with an unrelated immunogenic protein. Preferably the immunogenic protein is capable of eliciting a recall response. Examples of such proteins include tetanus, tuberculosis and hepatitis proteins (see, e.g., Stoute et al., New Engl. J. Med. 336:86-91 (1997)).
  • Within preferred embodiments, an immunological fusion partner is derived from protein D, a surface protein of the gram-negative bacterium Haemophilus influenza B (WO 91/18926). Preferably, a protein D derivative comprises approximately the first third of the protein (e.g., the first N-terminal 100-110 amino acids), and a protein D derivative may be lipidated. Within certain preferred embodiments, the first 109 residues of a lipoprotein D fusion partner is included on the N-terminus to provide the polypeptide with additional exogenous T-cell epitopes and to increase the expression level in E. coli (thus functioning as an expression enhancer). The lipid tail ensures optimal presentation of the antigen to antigen presenting cells. Other fusion partners include the non-structural protein from influenzae virus, NS1 (hemaglutinin). Typically, the N-terminal 81 amino acids are used, although different fragments that include T-helper epitopes may be used.
  • In another embodiment, the immunological fusion partner is the protein known as LYTA, or a portion thereof (preferably a C-terminal portion); LYTA is derived from Streptococcus pneumoniae, which synthesizes an N-acetyl-L-alanine amidase known as amidase LYTA (encoded by the LytA gene; Gene 43:265-292 (1986)). LYTA is an autolysin that specifically degrades certain bonds in the peptidoglycan backbone. The C-terminal domain of the LYTA protein is responsible for the affinity to the choline or to some choline analogues such as DEAE. This property has been exploited for the development of E. coli C-LYTA expressing plasmids useful for expression of fusion proteins. Purification of hybrid proteins containing the C-LYTA fragment at the amino terminus has been described (see Biotechnology 10:795-798 (1992)). Within a preferred embodiment, a repeat portion of LYTA may be incorporated into a fusion protein. A repeat portion is found in the C-terminal region starting at residue 178. A particularly preferred repeat portion incorporates residues 188-305.
  • In general, polypeptides (including fusion proteins) and polynucleotides as described herein are isolated. An “isolated” polypeptide or polynucleotide is one that is removed from its original environment. For example, a naturally-occurring protein is isolated if it is separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in the natural system. Preferably, such polypeptides are at least about 90% pure, more preferably at least about 95% pure and most preferably at least about 99% pure. A polynucleotide is considered to be isolated if, for example, it is cloned into a vector that is not a part of the natural environment.
  • T Cells
  • Immunotherapeutic compositions may also, or alternatively, comprise T cells specific for a Mycobacterium antigen. Such cells may generally be prepared in vitro or ex vivo, using standard procedures. For example, T cells may be isolated from bone marrow, peripheral blood, or a fraction of bone marrow or peripheral blood of a patient, using a commercially available cell separation system, such as the Isolex™ System, available from Nexell Therapeutics, Inc. (Irvine, Calif.; see also U.S. Pat. No. 5,240,856; U.S. Patent No. 5,215,926; WO 89/06280; WO 91/16116 and WO 92/07243). Alternatively, T cells may be derived from related or unrelated humans, non-human mammals, cell lines or cultures.
  • T cells may be stimulated with a polypeptide of the invention, polynucleotide encoding such a polypeptide, and/or an antigen presenting cell (APC) that expresses such a polypeptide. Such stimulation is performed under conditions and for a time sufficient to permit the generation of T cells that are specific for the polypeptide. Preferably, the polypeptide or polynucleotide is present within a delivery vehicle, such as a microsphere, to facilitate the generation of specific T cells.
  • T cells are considered to be specific for a polypeptide of the invention if the T cells specifically proliferate, secrete cytokines or kill target cells coated with the polypeptide or expressing a gene encoding the polypeptide. T cell specificity may be evaluated using any of a variety of standard techniques. For example, within a chromium release assay or proliferation assay, a stimulation index of more than two fold increase in lysis and/or proliferation, compared to negative controls, indicates T cell specificity. Such assays may be performed, for example, as described in Chen et al., Cancer Res. 54:1065-1070 (1994)). Alternatively, detection of the proliferation of T cells may be accomplished by a variety of known techniques. For example, T cell proliferation can be detected by measuring an increased rate of DNA synthesis (e.g., by pulse-labeling cultures of T cells with tritiated thymidine and measuring the amount of tritiated thymidine incorporated into DNA). Contact with a polypeptide of the invention (100 ng/ml-100 μg/ml, preferably 200 ng/ml-25 μg/ml) for 3-7 days should result in at least a two fold increase in proliferation of the T cells. Contact as described above for 2-3 hours should result in activation of the T cells, as measured using standard cytokine assays in which a two fold increase in the level of cytokine release (e.g., TNF or IFN-γ) is indicative of T cell activation (see Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Immunology, vol. 1 (1998)). T cells that have been activated in response to a polypeptide, polynucleotide or polypeptide-expressing APC may be CD4+ and/or CD8+. Protein-specific T cells may be expanded using standard techniques. Within preferred embodiments, the T cells are derived from a patient, a related donor or an unrelated donor, and are administered to the patient following stimulation and expansion.
  • For therapeutic purposes, CD4+ or CD8+ T cells that proliferate in response to a polypeptide, polynucleotide or APC can be expanded in number either in vitro or in vivo. Proliferation of such T cells in vitro may be accomplished in a variety of ways. For example, the T cells can be re-exposed to a polypeptide, or a short peptide corresponding to an immunogenic portion of such a polypeptide, with or without the addition of T cell growth factors, such as interleukin-2, and/or stimulator cells that synthesize the polypeptide. Alternatively, one or more T cells that proliferate in the presence of the protein can be expanded in number by cloning. Methods for cloning cells are well known in the art, and include limiting dilution.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • In additional embodiments, the present invention concerns formulation of one or more of the polynucleotide, polypeptide, T-cell and/or antibody compositions disclosed herein in pharmaceutically-acceptable or physiologically-acceptable solutions for administration to a cell or an animal, either alone, or in combination with one or more other modalities of therapy. Such compositions are also useful for diagnostic uses.
  • It will also be understood that, if desired, the nucleic acid segment, RNA, DNA or PNA compositions that express a polypeptide as disclosed herein may be administered in combination with other agents as well, such as, e.g., other proteins or polypeptides or various pharmaceutically-active agents. In fact, there is virtually no limit to other components that may also be included, given that the additional agents do not cause a significant adverse effect upon contact with the target cells or host tissues. The compositions may thus be delivered along with various other agents as required in the particular instance. Such compositions may be purified from host cells or other biological sources, or alternatively may be chemically synthesized as described herein. Likewise, such compositions may further comprise substituted or derivatized RNA or DNA compositions.
  • Formulation of pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients and carrier solutions is well-known to those of skill in the art, as is the development of suitable dosing and treatment regimens for using the particular compositions described herein in a variety of treatment regimens, including e.g., oral, parenteral, intravenous, intranasal, and intramuscular administration and formulation.
  • 1. Oral Delivery
  • In certain applications, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be delivered via oral administration to an animal. As such, these compositions may be formulated with an inert diluent or with an assimilable edible carrier, or they may be enclosed in hard- or soft-shell gelatin capsule, or they may be compressed into tablets, or they may be incorporated directly with the food of the diet.
  • The active compounds may even be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of ingestible tablets, buccal tables, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, and the like (Mathiowitz et al., 1997; Hwang et al., 1998; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515; U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,579 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,792,451, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). The tablets, troches, pills, capsules and the like may also contain the following: a binder, as gum tragacanth, acacia, cornstarch, or gelatin; excipients, such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent, such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid and the like; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent, such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin may be added or a flavoring agent, such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier. Various other materials may be present as coatings or to otherwise modify the physical form of the dosage unit. For instance, tablets, pills, or capsules may be coated with shellac, sugar, or both. A syrup of elixir may contain the active compound sucrose as a sweetening agent methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and flavoring, such as cherry or orange flavor. Of course, any material used in preparing any dosage unit form should be pharmaceutically pure and substantially non-toxic in the amounts employed. In addition, the active compounds may be incorporated into sustained-release preparation and formulations.
  • Typically, these formulations may contain at least about 0.1% of the active compound or more, although the percentage of the active ingredient(s) may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 1 or 2% and about 60% or 70% or more of the weight or volume of the total formulation. Naturally, the amount of active compound(s) in each therapeutically useful composition may be prepared is such a way that a suitable dosage will be obtained in any given unit dose of the compound. Factors such as solubility, bioavailability, biological half-life, route of administration, product shelf life, as well as other pharmacological considerations will be contemplated by one skilled in the art of preparing such pharmaceutical formulations, and as such, a variety of dosages and treatment regimens may be desirable.
  • For oral administration the compositions of the present invention may alternatively be incorporated with one or more excipients in the form of a mouthwash, dentifrice, buccal tablet, oral spray, or sublingual orally-administered formulation. For example, a mouthwash may be prepared incorporating the active ingredient in the required amount in an appropriate solvent, such as a sodium borate solution (Dobell's Solution). Alternatively, the active ingredient may be incorporated into an oral solution such as one containing sodium borate, glycerin and potassium bicarbonate, or dispersed in a dentifrice, or added in a therapeutically-effective amount to a composition that may include water, binders, abrasives, flavoring agents, foaming agents, and humectants. Alternatively the compositions may be fashioned into a tablet or solution form that may be placed under the tongue or otherwise dissolved in the mouth.
  • 2. Injectable Delivery
  • In certain circumstances it will be desirable to deliver the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly, or even intraperitoneally as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158; U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,363 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Solutions of the active compounds as free base or pharmacologically acceptable salts may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant, such as hydroxypropylcellulose. Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In all cases the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils. Proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be facilitated by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • For parenteral administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first rendered isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose. These particular aqueous solutions are especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous and intraperitoneal administration. In this connection, a sterile aqueous medium that can be employed will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. For example, one dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to 1000 ml of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th Edition, pp. 1035-1038 and 1570-1580). Some variation in dosage will necessarily occur depending on the condition of the subject being treated. The person responsible for administration will, in any event, determine the appropriate dose for the individual subject. Moreover, for human administration, preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, and the general safety and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biologics standards.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the active compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • The compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in a neutral or salt form. Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic acids such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, histidine, procaine and the like. Upon formulation, solutions will be administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation and in such amount as is therapeutically effective. The formulations are easily administered in a variety of dosage forms such as injectable solutions, drug-release capsules, and the like.
  • As used herein, “carrier” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human. The preparation of an aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art. Typically, such compositions are prepared as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared. The preparation can also be emulsified.
  • 3. Nasal Delivery
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions may be delivered by intranasal sprays, inhalation, and/or other aerosol delivery vehicles. Methods for delivering genes, nucleic acids, and peptide compositions directly to the lungs via nasal aerosol sprays has been described e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,756,353 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,804,212 (each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Likewise, the delivery of drugs using intranasal microparticle resins (Takenaga et al., 1998) and lysophosphatidyl-glycerol compounds (U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,871, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) are also well-known in the pharmaceutical arts. Likewise, transmucosal drug delivery in the form of a polytetrafluoroetheylene support matrix is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,780,045 (specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • 4. Liposome-, Nanocapsule-, and Microparticle-Mediated Delivery
  • In certain embodiments, the inventors contemplate the use of liposomes, nanocapsules, microparticles, microspheres, lipid particles, vesicles, and the like, for the introduction of the compositions of the present invention into suitable host cells. In particular, the compositions of the present invention may be formulated for delivery either encapsulated in a lipid particle, a liposome, a vesicle, a nanosphere, or a nanoparticle or the like.
  • Such formulations may be preferred for the introduction of pharmaceutically-acceptable formulations of the nucleic acids or constructs disclosed herein. The formation and use of liposomes is generally known to those of skill in the art (see for example, Couvreur et al., 1977; Couvreur, 1988; Lasic, 1998; which describes the use of liposomes and nanocapsules in the targeted antibiotic therapy for intracellular bacterial infections and diseases). Recently, liposomes were developed with improved serum stability and circulation half-times (Gabizon & Papahadjopoulos, 1988; Allen and Choun, 1987; U.S. Pat. No. 5,741,516, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Further, various methods of liposome and liposome like preparations as potential drug carriers have been reviewed (Takakura, 1998; Chandran et al., 1997; Margalit, 1995; U.S. Pat. No. 5,567,434; U.S. Pat. No. 5,552,157; U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,213; U.S. Pat. No. 5,738,868 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,795,587, each specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • Liposomes have been used successfully with a number of cell types that are normally resistant to transfection by other procedures including T cell suspensions, primary hepatocyte cultures and PC 12 cells (Renneisen et al., 1990; Muller et al., 1990). In addition, liposomes are free of the DNA length constraints that are typical of viral-based delivery systems. Liposomes have been used effectively to introduce genes, drugs (Heath & Martin, 1986; Heath et al., 1986; Balazsovits et al., 1989; Fresta & Puglisi, 1996), radiotherapeutic agents (Pikul et al., 1987), enzymes (Imaizumi et al., 1990a; Imaizumi et al., 1990b), viruses (Faller & Baltimore, 1984), transcription factors and allosteric effectors (Nicolau & Gersonde, 1979) into a variety of cultured cell lines and animals. In addition, several successful clinical trails examining the effectiveness of liposome-mediated drug delivery have been completed (Lopez-Berestein et al., 1985a; 1985b; Coune, 1988; Sculier et al., 1988). Furthermore, several studies suggest that the use of liposomes is not associated with autoimmune responses, toxicity or gonadal localization after systemic delivery (Mori & Fukatsu, 1992).
  • Liposomes are formed from phospholipids that are dispersed in an aqueous medium and spontaneously form multilamellar concentric bilayer vesicles (also termed multilamellar vesicles (MLVs). MLVs generally have diameters of from 25 nm to 4 μm. Sonication of MLVs results in the formation of small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) with diameters in the range of 200 to 500 Å, containing an aqueous solution in the core.
  • Liposomes bear resemblance to cellular membranes and are contemplated for use in connection with the present invention as carriers for the peptide compositions. They are widely suitable as both water- and lipid-soluble substances can be entrapped, i.e. in the aqueous spaces and within the bilayer itself, respectively. It is possible that the drug-bearing liposomes may even be employed for site-specific delivery of active agents by selectively modifying the liposomal formulation.
  • In addition to the teachings of Couvreur et al. (1977; 1988), the following information may be utilized in generating liposomal formulations. Phospholipids can form a variety of structures other than liposomes when dispersed in water, depending on the molar ratio of lipid to water. At low ratios the liposome is the preferred structure. The physical characteristics of liposomes depend on pH, ionic strength and the presence of divalent cations. Liposomes can show low permeability to ionic and polar substances, but at elevated temperatures undergo a phase transition which markedly alters their permeability. The phase transition involves a change from a closely packed, ordered structure, known as the gel state, to a loosely packed, less-ordered structure, known as the fluid state. This occurs at a characteristic phase-transition temperature and results in an increase in permeability to ions, sugars and drugs.
  • In addition to temperature, exposure to proteins can alter the permeability of liposomes. Certain soluble proteins, such as cytochrome c, bind, deform and penetrate the bilayer, thereby causing changes in permeability. Cholesterol inhibits this penetration of proteins, apparently by packing the phospholipids more tightly. It is contemplated that the most useful liposome formations for antibiotic and inhibitor delivery will contain cholesterol.
  • The ability to trap solutes varies between different types of liposomes. For example, MLVs are moderately efficient at trapping solutes, but SUVs are extremely inefficient. SUVs offer the advantage of homogeneity and reproducibility in size distribution, however, and a compromise between size and trapping efficiency is offered by large unilamellar vesicles (LUVs). These are prepared by ether evaporation and are three to four times more efficient at solute entrapment than MLVs.
  • In addition to liposome characteristics, an important determinant in entrapping compounds is the physicochemical properties of the compound itself. Polar compounds are trapped in the aqueous spaces and nonpolar compounds bind to the lipid bilayer of the vesicle. Polar compounds are released through permeation or when the bilayer is broken, but nonpolar compounds remain affiliated with the bilayer unless it is disrupted by temperature or exposure to lipoproteins. Both types show maximum efflux rates at the phase transition temperature.
  • Liposomes interact with cells via four different mechanisms: endocytosis by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system such as macrophages and neutrophils; adsorption to the cell surface, either by nonspecific weak hydrophobic or electrostatic forces, or by specific interactions with cell-surface components; fusion with the plasma cell membrane by insertion of the lipid bilayer of the liposome into the plasma membrane, with simultaneous release of liposomal contents into the cytoplasm; and by transfer of liposomal lipids to cellular or subcellular membranes, or vice versa, without any association of the liposome contents. It often is difficult to determine which mechanism is operative and more than one may operate at the same time.
  • The fate and disposition of intravenously injected liposomes depend on their physical properties, such as size, fluidity, and surface charge. They may persist in tissues for h or days, depending on their composition, and half lives in the blood range from min to several h. Larger liposomes, such as MLVs and LUVs, are taken up rapidly by phagocytic cells of the reticuloendothelial system, but physiology of the circulatory system restrains the exit of such large species at most sites. They can exit only in places where large openings or pores exist in the capillary endothelium, such as the sinusoids of the liver or spleen. Thus, these organs are the predominate site of uptake. On the other hand, SUVs show a broader tissue distribution but still are sequestered highly in the liver and spleen. In general, this in vivo behavior limits the potential targeting of liposomes to only those organs and tissues accessible to their large size. These include the blood, liver, spleen, bone marrow, and lymphoid organs.
  • Targeting is generally not a limitation in terms of the present invention. However, should specific targeting be desired, methods are available for this to be accomplished. Antibodies may be used to bind to the liposome surface and to direct the antibody and its drug contents to specific antigenic receptors located on a particular cell-type surface. Carbohydrate determinants (glycoprotein or glycolipid cell-surface components that play a role in cell-cell recognition, interaction and adhesion) may also be used as recognition sites as they have potential in directing liposomes to particular cell types. Mostly, it is contemplated that intravenous injection of liposomal preparations would be used, but other routes of administration are also conceivable.
  • Alternatively, the invention provides for pharmaceutically-acceptable nanocapsule formulations of the compositions of the present invention. Nanocapsules can generally entrap compounds in a stable and reproducible way (Henry-Michelland et al., 1987; Quintanar-Guerrero et al., 1998; Douglas et al., 1987). To avoid side effects due to intracellular polymeric overloading, such ultrafine particles (sized around 0.1 μm) should be designed using polymers able to be degraded in vivo. Biodegradable polyalkyl-cyanoacrylate nanoparticles that meet these requirements are contemplated for use in the present invention. Such particles may be are easily made, as described (Couvreur et al., 1980; 1988; zur Muhlen et al., 1998; Zambaux et al. 1998; Pinto-Alphandry et al., 1995 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,145,684, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • Vaccines
  • In certain preferred embodiments of the present invention, vaccines are provided. The vaccines will generally comprise one or more pharmaceutical compositions, such as those discussed above, in combination with an immunostimulant. An immunostimulant may be any substance that enhances or potentiates an immune response (antibody and/or cell-mediated) to an exogenous antigen. Examples of immunostimulants include adjuvants, biodegradable microspheres (e.g., polylactic galactide) and liposomes (into which the compound is incorporated; see, e.g., Fullerton, U.S. Pat. No. 4,235,877). Vaccine preparation is generally described in, for example, Powell & Newman, eds., Vaccine Design (the subunit and adjuvant approach) (1995). Pharmaceutical compositions and vaccines within the scope of the present invention may also contain other compounds, which may be biologically active or inactive. For example, one or more immunogenic portions of other tumor antigens may be present, either incorporated into a fusion polypeptide or as a separate compound, within the composition or vaccine.
  • Illustrative vaccines may contain DNA encoding one or more of the polypeptides as described above, such that the polypeptide is generated in situ. As noted above, the DNA may be present within any of a variety of delivery systems known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including nucleic acid expression systems, bacteria and viral expression systems. Numerous gene delivery techniques are well known in the art, such as those described by Rolland, Crit. Rev. Therap. Drug Carrier Systems 15:143-198 (1998), and references cited therein. Appropriate nucleic acid expression systems contain the necessary DNA sequences for expression in the patient (such as a suitable promoter and terminating signal). Bacterial delivery systems involve the administration of a bacterium (such as Bacillus-Calmette-Guerrin) that expresses an immunogenic portion of the polypeptide on its cell surface or secretes such an epitope. In a preferred embodiment, the DNA may be introduced using a viral expression system (e.g., vaccinia or other pox virus, retrovirus, or adenovirus), which may involve the use of a non-pathogenic (defective), replication competent virus. Suitable systems are disclosed, for example, in Fisher-Hoch et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:317-321 (1989); Flexner et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 569:86-103 (1989); Flexner et al., Vaccine 8:17-21 (1990); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,603,112, 4,769,330, and 5,017,487; WO 89/01973; U.S. Pat. No. 4,777,127; GB 2,200,651; EP 0,345,242; WO 91/02805; Berkner, Biotechniques 6:616-627 (1988); Rosenfeld et al., Science 252:431-434 (1991); Kolls et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:215-219 (1994); Kass-Eisler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:11498-11502 (1993); Guzman et al., Circulation 88:2838-2848 (1993); and Guzman et al., Cir. Res. 73:1202-1207 (1993). Techniques for incorporating DNA into such expression systems are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The DNA may also be “naked,” as described, for example, in Ulmer et al., Science 259:1745-1749 (1993) and reviewed by Cohen, Science 259:1691-1692 (1993). The uptake of naked DNA may be increased by coating the DNA onto biodegradable beads, which are efficiently transported into the cells. It will be apparent that a vaccine may comprise both a polynucleotide and a polypeptide component. Such vaccines may provide for an enhanced immune response.
  • It will be apparent that a vaccine may contain pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the polynucleotides and polypeptides provided herein. Such salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases, including organic bases (e.g., salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines and basic amino acids) and inorganic bases (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts).
  • While any suitable carrier known to those of ordinary skill in the art may be employed in the vaccine compositions of this invention, the type of carrier will vary depending on the mode of administration. Compositions of the present invention may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including for example, topical, oral, nasal, intravenous, intracranial, intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular administration. For parenteral administration, such as subcutaneous injection, the carrier preferably comprises water, saline, alcohol, a fat, a wax or a buffer. For oral administration, any of the above carriers or a solid carrier, such as mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, talcum, cellulose, glucose, sucrose, and magnesium carbonate, may be employed. Biodegradable microspheres (e.g., polylactate polyglycolate) may also be employed as carriers for the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. Suitable biodegradable microspheres are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,897,268; 5,075,109; 5,928,647; 5,811,128; 5,820,883; 5,853,763; 5,814,344 and 5,942,252. One may also employ a carrier comprising the particulate-protein complexes described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,647, which are capable of inducing a class I-restricted cytotoxic T lymphocyte responses in a host.
  • Such compositions may also comprise buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, bacteriostats, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione, adjuvants (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), solutes that render the formulation isotonic, hypotonic or weakly hypertonic with the blood of a recipient, suspending agents, thickening agents and/or preservatives. Alternatively, compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Compounds may also be encapsulated within liposomes using well known technology.
  • Any of a variety of immunostimulants may be employed in the vaccines of this invention. For example, an adjuvant may be included. Most adjuvants contain a substance designed to protect the antigen from rapid catabolism, such as aluminum hydroxide or mineral oil, and a stimulator of immune responses, such as lipid A, Bortadella pertussis or Mycobacterium species or Mycobacterium derived proteins. For example, delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae (“pVac”) can be used. In another embodiment, BCG is used as an adjuvant. In addition, the vaccine can be administered to a subject previously exposed to BCG. Suitable adjuvants are commercially available as, for example, Freund's Incomplete Adjuvant and Complete Adjuvant (Difco Laboratories, Detroit, Mich.); Merck Adjuvant 65 (Merck and Company, Inc., Rahway, N.J.); AS-2 and derivatives thereof (SmithKline Beecham, Philadelphia, Pa.); CWS, TDM, Leif, aluminum salts such as aluminum hydroxide gel (alum) or aluminum phosphate; salts of calcium, iron or zinc; an insoluble suspension of acylated tyrosine; acylated sugars; cationically or anionically derivatized polysaccharides; polyphosphazenes; biodegradable microspheres; monophosphoryl lipid A and quil A. Cytokines, such as GM-CSF or interleukin-2, -7, or -12, may also be used as adjuvants.
  • Within the vaccines provided herein, the adjuvant composition is preferably designed to induce an immune response predominantly of the Th1 type. High levels of Th1-type cytokines (e.g., IFN-γ, TNFα, IL-2 and IL-12) tend to favor the induction of cell mediated immune responses to an administered antigen. In contrast, high levels of Th2-type cytokines (e.g., IL-4, IL-5, IL-6 and IL-10) tend to favor the induction of humoral immune responses. Following application of a vaccine as provided herein, a patient will support an immune response that includes Th1- and Th2-type responses. Within a preferred embodiment, in which a response is predominantly Th1-type, the level of Th1-type cytokines will increase to a greater extent than the level of Th2-type cytokines. The levels of these cytokines may be readily assessed using standard assays. For a review of the families of cytokines, see Mosmann & Coffman, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 7:145-173 (1989).
  • Preferred adjuvants for use in eliciting a predominantly Th1-type response include, for example, a combination of monophosphoryl lipid A, preferably 3-de-O-acylated monophosphoryl lipid A (3D-MPL), together with an aluminum salt. MPL adjuvants are available from Corixa Corporation (Seattle, Wash.; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,436,727; 4,877,611; 4,866,034 and 4,912,094). CpG-containing oligonucleotides (in which the CpG dinucleotide is unmethylated) also induce a predominantly Th1 response. Such oligonucleotides are well known and are described, for example, in WO 96/02555, WO 99/33488 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,008,200 and 5,856,462. Immunostimulatory DNA sequences are also described, for example, by Sato et al., Science 273:352 (1996). Another preferred adjuvant comprises a saponin, such as Quil A, or derivatives thereof, including QS21 and QS7 (Aquila Biopharmaceuticals Inc., Framingham, Mass.); Escin; Digitonin; or Gypsophila or Chenopodium quinoa saponins. Other preferred formulations include more than one saponin in the adjuvant combinations of the present invention, for example combinations of at least two of the following group comprising QS21, QS7, Quil A, β-escin, or digitonin.
  • Alternatively the saponin formulations may be combined with vaccine vehicles composed of chitosan or other polycationic polymers, polylactide and polylactide-co-glycolide particles, poly-N-acetyl glucosamine-based polymer matrix, particles composed of polysaccharides or chemically modified polysaccharides, liposomes and lipid-based particles, particles composed of glycerol monoesters, etc. The saponins may also be formulated in the presence of cholesterol to form particulate structures such as liposomes or ISCOMs. Furthermore, the saponins may be formulated together with a polyoxyethylene ether or ester, in either a non-particulate solution or suspension, or in a particulate structure such as a paucilamelar liposome or ISCOM. The saponins may also be formulated with excipients such as CarbopolR to increase viscosity, or may be formulated in a dry powder form with a powder excipient such as lactose.
  • In one preferred embodiment, the adjuvant system includes the combination of a monophosphoryl lipid A and a saponin derivative, such as the combination of QS21 and 3D-MPL® adjuvant, as described in WO 94/00153, or a less reactogenic composition where the QS21 is quenched with cholesterol, as described in WO 96/33739. Other preferred formulations comprise an oil-in-water emulsion and tocopherol. Another particularly preferred adjuvant formulation employing QS21, 3D-MPL® adjuvant and tocopherol in an oil-in-water emulsion is described in WO 95/17210.
  • Another enhanced adjuvant system involves the combination of a CpG-containing oligonucleotide and a saponin derivative particularly the combination of CpG and QS21 as disclosed in WO 00/09159. Preferably the formulation additionally comprises an oil in water emulsion and tocopherol.
  • Other preferred adjuvants include Montanide ISA 720 (Seppic, France), SAF (Chiron, Calif., United States), ISCOMS (CSL), MF-59 (Chiron), the SBAS series of adjuvants (e.g., SBAS-2, AS2′, AS2,″ SBAS-4, or SBAS6, available from SmithKline Beecham, Rixensart, Belgium), Detox (Corixa, Hamilton, Mont.), RC-529 (Corixa, Hamilton, Mont.) and other aminoalkyl glucosaminide 4-phosphates (AGPs), such as those described in pending U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 08/853,826 and 09/074,720, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties, and polyoxyethylene ether adjuvants such as those described in WO 99/52549A1.
  • Other preferred adjuvants include adjuvant molecules of the general formula (I): HO(CH2CH2O)n-A-R,
  • wherein, n is 1-50, A is a bond or —C(O)—, R is C1-50 alkyl or Phenyl C1-50 alkyl.
  • One embodiment of the present invention consists of a vaccine formulation comprising a polyoxyethylene ether of general formula (I), wherein n is between 1 and 50, preferably 4-24, most preferably 9; the R component is C1-50, preferably C4-C20 alkyl and most preferably C12 alkyl, and A is a bond. The concentration of the polyoxyethylene ethers should be in the range 0.1-20%, preferably from 0.1-10%, and most preferably in the range 0.1-1%. Preferred polyoxyethylene ethers are selected from the following group: polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-9-steoryl ether, polyoxyethylene-8-steoryl ether, polyoxyethylene-4-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-35-lauryl ether, and polyoxyethylene-23-lauryl ether. Polyoxyethylene ethers such as polyoxyethylene lauryl ether are described in the Merck index (12th edition: entry 7717). These adjuvant molecules are described in WO 99/52549.
  • The polyoxyethylene ether according to the general formula (I) above may, if desired, be combined with another adjuvant. For example, a preferred adjuvant combination is preferably with CpG as described in the pending UK patent application GB 9820956.2.
  • Any vaccine provided herein may be prepared using well known methods that result in a combination of antigen, immune response enhancer and a suitable carrier or excipient. The compositions described herein may be administered as part of a sustained release formulation (i.e., a formulation such as a capsule, sponge or gel (composed of polysaccharides, for example) that effects a slow release of compound following administration). Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology (see, e.g., Coombes et al., Vaccine 14:1429-1438 (1996)) and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Sustained-release formulations may contain a polypeptide, polynucleotide or antibody dispersed in a carrier matrix and/or contained within a reservoir surrounded by a rate controlling membrane.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of active component release. Such carriers include microparticles of poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyacrylate, latex, starch, cellulose, dextran and the like. Other delayed-release carriers include supramolecular biovectors, which comprise a non-liquid hydrophilic core (e.g., a cross-linked polysaccharide or oligosaccharide) and, optionally, an external layer comprising an amphiphilic compound, such as a phospholipid (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,151,254 and PCT applications WO 94/20078, WO/94/23701 and WO 96/06638). The amount of active compound contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Any of a variety of delivery vehicles may be employed within pharmaceutical compositions and vaccines to facilitate production of an antigen-specific immune response that targets tumor cells. Delivery vehicles include antigen presenting cells (APCs), such as dendritic cells, macrophages, B cells, monocytes and other cells that may be engineered to be efficient APCs. Such cells may, but need not, be genetically modified to increase the capacity for presenting the antigen, to improve activation and/or maintenance of the T cell response, to have anti-tumor effects per se and/or to be immunologically compatible with the receiver (i.e., matched HLA haplotype). APCs may generally be isolated from any of a variety of biological fluids and organs, including tumor and peritumoral tissues, and may be autologous, allogeneic, syngeneic or xenogeneic cells.
  • Certain preferred embodiments of the present invention use dendritic cells or progenitors thereof as antigen-presenting cells. Dendritic cells are highly potent APCs (Banchereau & Steinman, Nature 392:245-251 (1998)) and have been shown to be effective as a physiological adjuvant for eliciting prophylactic or therapeutic antitumor immunity (see Timmerman & Levy, Ann. Rev. Med. 50:507-529 (1999)). In general, dendritic cells may be identified based on their typical shape (stellate in situ, with marked cytoplasmic processes (dendrites) visible in vitro), their ability to take up, process and present antigens with high efficiency and their ability to activate naive T cell responses. Dendritic cells may, of course, be engineered to express specific cell-surface receptors or ligands that are not commonly found on dendritic cells in vivo or ex vivo, and such modified dendritic cells are contemplated by the present invention. As an alternative to dendritic cells, secreted vesicles antigen-loaded dendritic cells (called exosomes) may be used within a vaccine (see Zitvogel et al., Nature Med. 4:594-600 (1998)).
  • Dendritic cells and progenitors may be obtained from peripheral blood, bone marrow, tumor-infiltrating cells, peritumoral tissues-infiltrating cells, lymph nodes, spleen, skin, umbilical cord blood or any other suitable tissue or fluid. For example, dendritic cells may be differentiated ex vivo by adding a combination of cytokines such as GM-CSF, IL-4, IL-13 and/or TNFα to cultures of monocytes harvested from peripheral blood. Alternatively, CD34 positive cells harvested from peripheral blood, umbilical cord blood or bone marrow may be differentiated into dendritic cells by adding to the culture medium combinations of GM-CSF, IL-3, TNFα, CD40 ligand, LPS, flt3 ligand and/or other compound(s) that induce differentiation, maturation and proliferation of dendritic cells.
  • Dendritic cells are conveniently categorized as “immature” and “mature” cells, which allows a simple way to discriminate between two well characterized phenotypes. However, this nomenclature should not be construed to exclude all possible intermediate stages of differentiation. Immature dendritic cells are-characterized as APC with a high capacity for antigen uptake and processing, which correlates with the high expression of Fcγ receptor and mannose receptor. The mature phenotype is typically characterized by a lower expression of these markers, but a high expression of cell surface molecules responsible for T cell activation such as class I and class II MHC, adhesion molecules (e.g., CD54 and CD11) and costimulatory molecules (e.g., CD40, CD80, CD86 and 4-1BB).
  • APCs may generally be transfected with a polynucleotide encoding a protein (or portion or other variant thereof) such that the polypeptide, or an immunogenic portion thereof, is expressed on the cell surface. Such transfection may take place ex vivo, and a composition or vaccine comprising such transfected cells may then be used for therapeutic purposes, as described herein. Alternatively, a gene delivery vehicle that targets a dendritic or other antigen presenting cell may be administered to a patient, resulting in transfection that occurs in vivo. In vivo and ex vivo transfection of dendritic cells, for example, may generally be performed using any methods known in the art, such as those described in WO 97/24447, or the gene gun approach described by Mahvi et al., Immunology and Cell Biology 75:456-460 (1997). Antigen loading of dendritic cells may be achieved by incubating dendritic cells or progenitor cells with the polypeptide, DNA (naked or within a plasmid vector) or RNA; or with antigen-expressing recombinant bacterium or viruses (e.g., vaccinia, fowlpox, adenovirus or lentivirus vectors). Prior to loading, the polypeptide may be covalently conjugated to an immunological partner that provides T cell help (e.g., a carrier molecule). Alternatively, a dendritic cell may be pulsed with a non-conjugated immunological partner, separately or in the presence of the polypeptide.
  • Vaccines and pharmaceutical compositions may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, such as sealed ampoules or vials. Such containers are preferably hermetically sealed to preserve sterility of the formulation until use. In general, formulations may be stored as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles. Alternatively, a vaccine or pharmaceutical composition may be stored in a freeze-dried condition requiring only the addition of a sterile liquid carrier immediately prior to use.
  • Diagnostic Kits
  • The present invention further provides kits for use within any of the above diagnostic methods. Such kits typically comprise two or more components necessary for performing a diagnostic assay. Components may be compounds, reagents, containers and/or equipment. For example, one container within a kit may contain a monoclonal antibody or fragment thereof that specifically binds to a protein. Such antibodies or fragments may be provided attached to a support material, as described above. One or more additional containers may enclose elements, such as reagents or buffers, to be used in the assay. Such kits may also, or alternatively, contain a detection reagent as described above that contains a reporter group suitable for direct or indirect detection of antibody binding.
  • Alternatively, a kit may be designed to detect the level of mRNA encoding a protein in a biological sample. Such kits generally comprise at least one oligonucleotide probe or primer, as described above, that hybridizes to a polynucleotide encoding a protein. Such an oligonucleotide may be used, for example, within a PCR or hybridization assay. Additional components that may be present within such kits include a second oligonucleotide and/or a diagnostic reagent or container to facilitate the detection of a polynucleotide encoding a protein of the invention.
  • All publications and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
  • Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The following examples are provided by way of illustration only and not by way of limitation. Those of skill in the art will readily recognize a variety of noncritical parameters that could be changed or modified to yield essentially similar results.
  • Example 1 Guinea Pig Vaccination with MTB72F Fusion Protein and Compositions with Individual Antigens
  • Guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS1, SBAS2, or ASAS7 plus A1(OH)3), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9 plus Ra35 antigen composition.
    Methods:
    Groups:  1) SBAS1
     2) SBAS2
     3) SBAS7 + Al(OH)3
     4) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS1
     5) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS2
     6) TbH9 + Ra35 + SBAS7(Al(OH)3)
     7) MTB72F in SBAS1
     8) MTB72F in SBAS2
     9) MTB72F in SBAS7 + Al(OH)3
    10) PBS
    11) BCG
    Dosage: 4 μg each of TbH9 and Ra35
    8 μg MTB72F
  • Protocol: 1st immunization, 2nd immunization approximately 3 weeks later, 3rd immunization approximately two and a half weeks later.
  • Pre-challenge: DTH (delayed type hypersensitivity, used to determine antigenicity; 10 μg antigen)
  • Challenge: Aerosol with ˜30 cfu Erdman strain
  • Post challenge monitoring: Weight loss
      • Death (˜6 months post challenge)
  • Results:
  • 1. DTH
  • Positive reaction to the immunizing antigens. Reactions to individual antigens or the fusion protein were comparable. Skin test reactivity to PPD was only seen with the BCG immunized groups
  • 2. Protection: Guinea pigs vaccinated with MTB72F fusion protein afforded protection compared to those immunized with a mixture of antigens (see FIG. 1).
  • Example 2 Mouse Vaccination with MTB72F Fusion Protein and Compositions with Individual Antigens
  • As described above, mice were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS2, SBAS2′, SBAS2″, or SBAS6), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, MTB72F DNA, MTB59F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition.
    Methods:
    Groups: 1) MTB72F + SBAS2
    2) MTB72F + SBAS2′
    3) MTB72F + SBAS2″
    4) MTB72F + SBAS6
    5) Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35 in SBAS2
    6) MTB59F in SBAS2
    7) SBAS2
    8) MTB72F + delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae
    9) MTB72F DNA
    10) MTB72F + IFA
    11) MTB72F + BCG
    12) delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae
    13) BCG
    14) Saline
    15) MTB72F + SBAS2 (in house formulation)
  • 8 animals per group
  • Immunization schedule: First immunization, second immunization approximately 3 weeks later; third immunization approximately three weeks later.
  • Aerosol challenge approximately three months after first does
  • Spleen or lung cells were isolated and cultured; count CFU of cultures approximately three weeks after plating.
  • Dose: 8 μg MTB72F, 6.56 μg MTB59F, or 1.52, 4.3, and 2.24 μg, respectively, of Ra12, TbH9, and Ra35, mixed.
  • Results:
  • Of the AS adjuvants, AS2″+MTB72F gave the best protection in both the spleen and lung in this set of experiments (see FIGS. 2A and 2B). MTB72F gave ˜1 log better protection than MTB59F in both spleen and lung in this set of experiments, indicating that Ra12 provides additional benefit. Mixture of 12/H9/35+AS2 gave a better protection than MTB72F in this experiment. MTB72F DNA gave the best protection in this experiment, particularly in the spleen (>2 log). The protection was comparable in the lung to that seen with MTB72F protein+AS2″, in this experiment.
  • Example 3 Guinea Pig Vaccination with MTB72F Fusion Protein and Compositions with Individual Antigens
  • As described above, guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (SBAS2, SBAS2′, SBAS2″, or SBAS6), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, MTB72F DNA, MTB59F fusion protein in adjuvant, or TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition.
    Methods:
    Groups: 1) MTB72F + SBAS2
    2) MTB72F + SBAS2′
    3) MTB72F + SBAS2″
    4) MTB72F + SBAS6
    5) Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35 in SBAS2
    6) MTB59F in SBAS2
    7) SBAS2
    8) MTB72F + pvac
    9) MTB72F DNA
    10) MTB72F + IFA
    11) MTB72F + BCG
    12) BCG
    13) Saline
    14) delipidated, deglycolipidated M. vaccae
  • Antigens:
  • Antigens were formulated on a molar equivalent
  • 5 animals per group
  • Injection volume per dose is 250 μl (IM) containing
    MTB72F 20 μg
    Ra12, TbH9, Ra35 3.8, 10.8, and 5.6 μg
    MTB59F 16.4 μg
  • Schedule:
  • 1st immunization, 2nd immunization approximately three weeks later, 3rd immunization approximately three weeks later.
  • Challenge: one and one half months after first immunization.
  • Results:
  • ˜38 Wks post challenge
    Groups Alive State
     G1. MTB72F + AS2 1/5 [losing weight]
     G2. MTB72F + AS2′ 2/5 [not gaining weight]
     G3. MTB72F + AS2″ 3/5 [looking okay, but no
    weight gain]
     G4. MTB72F + AS6 2/5 [both these gaining
    weight]
     G5. MTBRa12 + H9 + Ra35 + AS2 4/5 [one maybe a bit peaked,
    but two gaining]
     G6. MTB59F + AS2 2/5 [both losing a little]
     G7. AS2 2/5 [both losing]
     G8. MTB72F + pVac 1/5 [not looking too good]
     G9. MTB72F DNA 3/5 [all holding steady]
    G10. MTB72F + IFA 2/5 [doing okay]
    G11. MTB72F + BCG 5/5 [eating very well]
    G12 BCG 4/5 [doing fine]
    G13 Saline all dead
    G14 pVac
    2/5 [not gaining weight]
  • By 50 weeks post challenge, while 80% (4/5) of the guinea pigs immunized with BCG+Mtb72F were still alive, only 20% (1/5) of those immunized with BCG alone were alive. At 85 weeks, 4/5 of the guinea pigs immunized with BCG+Mtb72F were still alive and healthy (see FIG. 7).
  • Example 4 Long Term Protection
  • As described above, guinea pigs were immunized with adjuvant alone (AS2 or AS2″), MTB72F fusion protein in adjuvant, TbH9, Ra35 and Ra12 antigen composition, or a variety of individual antigens in adjuvant.
  • Methods
    GROUPS ANTIGEN DOSE
     1. AS2″ + MTB39 (TbH9) 20 ug/250 ul (IM)
     2. AS2″ + MTB8.4 (DPV) 20 ug
     3. AS2″ + MTB9.9 (MTI) 20 ug
     4. AS2″ + MTB41 (MTCC#2) 20 ug
     5. AS2″ + MTB40 (HTCC#1) 20 ug
     6. AS2″ + MTB9.8 (MSL) 20 ug
     7. AS2″ + MTB72F 20 ug
     8. AS2″ + Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35 3.8 μg + 10.8 μg + 5.6 μg
       (molar equivalent)
     9. AS2″ + MTB71F + 20 μg + 20 μg + 10 μg
       MTB72F + HTCC#1
    10. AS2″ + Ra12 20 μg
    11. BCG
    12. AS2″
    13. AS2 + MTB72F
    14. AS2 + Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35
    15. AS2
  • Example 5 Monkey Vaccination with MTB72F Fusion Protein and Compositions with Individual Antigens
  • As described above, monkeys were immunized with MTB72F fusion protein in SBAS2 adjuvant, or MTB8.4 antigen composition in adjuvant, or a mixture of MTB72F and MTB8.4.
  • Methods:
  • Groups 1. Saline 2. BCG 3. MTB8.4/AS2
  • 4. MTB72F/AS2
  • 5. MTB72F/AS2 (one arm)+MTB8.4/AS2 (other arm)
  • 40 μg each antigen
  • Results:
  • At 8 weeks post challenge, monkeys immunized with BCG are showing signs of infection
  • Current data for 16 weeks post challenge reveals the following trend:
  • Groups immunized with MTB72F (4 and 5) are holding on their weights and have low ESR values compared to group 3 (MTB8.4 immunization) (Tables 1 and 2).
    TABLE 1
    Prophylactic Vaccine Study in Cynomolgus Monkeys with MTB8.4
    and MTB72F formulated in AS2 20 Weeks Post Challenge
    Net weight
    Groups ID Change (kg) Chest X-ray (onset) Status
    AS2 1398K   −24% Pn, bil, prog (wk 8) Alive
    4437B   −33% Pn, bil, prog (wk4) Dead
    2959G  −8.30% Pn, bil, prog (wk4) Alive
    605AE −14.00% Pn, rt, stable (wk 8) Alive
    BCG 3436A −15.00% Neg Alive
    3642G Plus 4.5% Pn, rt, prog (wk 8) Alive
    1190H     0% Neg Alive
    10511   −30% Pn, rt, prog (wk 8) Dead
    MTB8.4 3665C   −25% Pn, rt, prog (wk8) Dead
    2200F −18.00% Pn, rt, stable (wk8) Alive
    1654J −33.00% Pn, bil, prog (wk4) Dead
    4141C   −33% Pn, bil, prog (wk4) Dead
    MTB72F 3061C* Died after IT challenge
    1228G Plus 3.6% Bron, bil, stable for 3 mo Alive
    (wk8)
    3462E  −2.20% Neg Alive
    4254C Plus 1.21 Pn, rt, stable for 3 mo Alive
    (wk4)
    MTB8.4 4496A Plus 7% Pn, rt, stable for 1 mo Alive
    (wk 8)
    MTB72F 4422C −39.00% Pn, bil, prog (wk 4) Dead
    4416A Plus 11% Pn, rt, stable for 2 mo Alive
    (wk 12)
    2734E Plus 12.5% Susp infil rt, stable for 3 Alive
    mo (wk 8)
  • TABLE 2
    Prophylactic Vaccine Study in Cynomolgus Monkeys with
    MTB8.4 and MTB72F formulated in AS2
    Wks Post Challenge
    ESR
    Groups ID
    4 8 12 16 16 wks Chest X-ray
    AS2 1398K
    3 3 10 19 Pn, bil, progrsv
    4437B
    10 20 3 Died
    2959G 6 3 3 0 Pn, rt, progrsv
    605AE
    1 4 7 3 Pn, rt, stable
    BCG 3436A 0 8 7 15 Neg
    3642G 0 0 0 0 Pn, rt, progrsv
    1190H
    1 0 2 0 Neg
    1051I 0 8 22 7 Pn, bil, w/furt progrsn
    Died
    MTB8.4 3665C 12 30 19 Died
    2200F 1 7 2 0 Pn, rt, progrsv
    1654J
    20 8 21 7 Pn, bil, w/fur progrsn
    4141C 13 8 2 15 Pn, bil, w/fur progrsn
    MTB72F 3061C* Died after IT challenge
    1228G 0 1 20 0 Now stable
    3462E 0 0 0 0 Neg
    4254C 13 0 0 0 Pn, now stable
    MTB8.4/ 4496A 5 1 0 5 Pn, rt, w/furt prog
    MTB72F 4422C
    10 3 0 Died
    4416A 6 0 1 0 Pn, now stable
    2734E 0 0 0 0 Susp infil, now stable
  • Example 6 BCG Priming Experiment in Monkeys
  • 5 animals per group with four groups immunized with BCG and then rested, then immunized as described above and challenged. The following protocol will be used:
    Groups # animals Immunizing Antigen Antigen Dose
    1. Nothing 5 AS2
    2. BCG 5 AS2
    3. BCG 5 MTB72F 40 ug
    4. BCG 4 Ra12 + TbH9 + Ra35 Molar equiv of
    antigens in
    MTB72F dose
    5. BCG 4 MTB72F + MTB71F + MTB40 40 ug MTB72F
    40 ug MTB72F
    20 ug MTB40

    All antigens in formulated in AS2
  • Groups 4 and 5 have four animals each. Two of the BCG immunized monkeys died
    Antigens for T cell
    Immunizing proliferation and cytokine
    Groups # animals Antigen production assays
    1. Nothing 5 AS2 PHA, PPD, MTB72F,
    MTB71F, HTCC#1, DPV,
    MTCC#2, Ra12, TbH9,
    Ra35, MSL, MTI
    2. BCG 5 AS2 PHA, PPD, MTB72F,
    MTB71F, HTCC#1, DPV,
    MTCC#2, Ra12, TbH9,
    Ra35, MSL, MTI
    3. BCG 5 MTB72F PHA, PPD, MTB72F, Ra12,
    TbH9, Ra35
    4. BCG 4 Ra12 + TbH9 + PHA, PPD, MTB72F, Ra12,
    Ra35 TbH9, Ra35
    5. BCG 4 MTB72F + PHA, PPD, MTB72F,
    MTB71F + MTB71F, HTCC#1,
    MTB40 DPV, MTCC-2, Ra12,
    TbH9, Ra35, MSL,
    MTI
  • Example 7 Construction of Ra35MutSA and MTB72FMutSA
  • Expression of Mtb72f typically results in some breakdown products. In addition, the expression of the full-length sequences of the mature or full length form of Ra35 (Mtb32A) in E. coli has been difficult. The expressed product was only visible after immunoblotting with a polyclonal rabbit anti-Ra35 Ab indicative of low levels of protein expression. Even then, multiple specific species (bands) were detected indicative of auto-catalytic breakdown (degradation) of the recombinant antigen. This was presumed to be due to the expression of Ra35FL in E. coli as a biologically active form.
  • It has been previously shown that it was possible to express Ra35FL as two overlapping halves comprising the N-terminal (Ra35N-term, called Ra35) and C— term halves (Ra35C-term called Ra12). To enhance and stabilize the expression of the whole Ra35 molecule, a single point mutation was introduced at one of the residues within the active-site triad (substitution of Ser to Ala; see FIG. 6). This mutagenized form of Mtb32A can now be easily expressed at high levels in a stable form. In addition, to stabilize expression of Mtb72F, a single nucleotide substitution (T to G, resulting in a Ser to Ala change at position 710 of the fusion polypeptide) was incorporated in the sequence of Mtb72F at nucleotide position 2128 (see FIG. 5).
  • This stabilization is also readily accomplished by mutagenizing any one, any two, or all three of the three residues comprising the active site triad in Ra35FL, Ra35, or Mtb72F or other fusion proteins comprising Ra35 (His, Asp, or Ser). Mutagenesis can be performed using any technique known to one of skill in the art.
  • Example 8 Immunization of Mice with f Ra35FLMutSA-TbH9 and MTB72FMutSA
  • Eight mice per group were immunized with the compositions listed below, which include the adjuvant AS2A. The mice were then challenged with Mycobacterium tuberculosis, and survival of the mice was measured.
    Group Concentration of protein or DNA
     1. Mtb72f protein 1.5 mg/ml
     2. Mtb72f DNA 1.2 mg/ml
     3. Mtb72f-85b protein 0.6 mg/ml
     4. Mtb72f-85b DNA 1.1 mg/ml
     5. Mtb72f-MTI protein 1.3 mg/ml
     6. Mtb72f-MTI DNA 1.1 mg/ml
     7. Mtb72f MutSA protein 1.7 mg/ml
     8. MTB3AMutSA-TbH9 protein 2.4 mg/ml
     9. BCG
    10. AS2
    11. vector alone 1.5 mg/ml
    12. saline

Claims (35)

1-88. (canceled)
89. A fusion polypeptide comprising a first amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:14 and a second amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:8, wherein the amino acid corresponding to position 176 in SEQ ID NO:8 is not a serine.
90. The polypeptide of claim 89, further comprising a third amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:10.
91. The polypeptide of claim 89 or 90, wherein the amino acid corresponding to position 176 in SEQ ID NO:8 is an alanine.
92. The polypeptide of claim 89, which has at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:18 or SEQ ID NO:20.
93. The polypeptide of claim 89, comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:14 and the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:8, wherein the amino acid corresponding to position 176 in SEQ ID NO:8 is not a serine.
94. The polypeptide of claim 93, further comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:10.
95. The polypeptide of claim 93 or 94, further comprising a 6× histidine tag.
96. The polypeptide of claim 89, which consists of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:18.
97. The polypeptide of claim 89, which consists of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:20 with an alanine replacing the serine at position 577.
98. The polypeptide of claim 89, which is a soluble polypeptide.
99. The polypeptide of claim 89, which induces an antibody response.
100. The polypeptide of claim 89, which induces a T cell response.
101. A fusion protein comprising the polypeptide of claim 89 and a second heterologous polypeptide.
102. A composition comprising the polypeptide of claim 89 or the fusion protein of claim 101.
103. The composition of claim 102, further comprising an adjuvant.
104. An isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of claim 89.
105. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide further comprises a third amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:10.
106. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide has an amino acid sequence at least 95% identical to SEQ ID NO:18 or SEQ ID NO:20.
107. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:14 and the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:8, wherein the amino acid corresponding to position 176 in SEQ ID NO:8 is not a serine.
108. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide further comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:10.
109. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide further comprises a 6× histidine tag.
110. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:18.
111. The nucleic acid of claim 110, wherein the polynucleotide sequence is set forth in SEQ ID NO:17.
112. The nucleic acid of claim 104, wherein the polypeptide consists of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:20 with an alanine replacing the serine at position 577.
113. A recombinant expression cassette comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide of claim 89.
114. The expression cassette of claim 113, which is a viral vector.
115. A composition comprising the nucleic acid of claim 104.
116. The composition of claim 115, further comprising an adjuvant.
117. A method for eliciting an immune response in a mammal, the method comprising the step of administering to the mammal an immunologically effective amount of the polypeptide of claim 89.
118. The method of claim 117, wherein the polypeptide further comprises a third amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:10.
119. A method for eliciting an immune response in mammal, the method comprising the step of administering to the mammal an immunologically effective amount of the fusion protein of claim 101.
120. The method of claim 119, wherein the polypeptide further comprises a third amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:10.
121. A method for eliciting an immune response in a mammal, the method comprising the step of administering to the mammal an immunologically effective amount of the nucleic acid of claim 104.
122. The method of claim 121, wherein the polypeptide further comprises a third amino acid sequence having at least 95% sequence identity to SEQ ID NO:6.
US11/418,848 1998-12-30 2006-05-05 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis Expired - Fee Related US7976844B2 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/418,848 US7976844B2 (en) 2000-06-20 2006-05-05 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/980,961 US20090004226A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,459 US20080317716A1 (en) 2000-06-20 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,142 US7973153B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,211 US20080161263A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US12/490,272 US8071747B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2009-06-23 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/597,796 US7186412B1 (en) 1998-04-07 2000-06-20 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US26573701P 2001-02-01 2001-02-01
US09/886,349 US7083796B2 (en) 2000-06-20 2001-06-20 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/418,848 US7976844B2 (en) 2000-06-20 2006-05-05 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/597,796 Continuation-In-Part US7186412B1 (en) 1998-04-07 2000-06-20 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US09/886,349 Continuation US7083796B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2001-06-20 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Related Child Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/981,211 Continuation US20080161263A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,459 Continuation US20080317716A1 (en) 2000-06-20 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,142 Division US7973153B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/980,961 Continuation US20090004226A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US12/490,272 Continuation US8071747B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2009-06-23 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060193876A1 true US20060193876A1 (en) 2006-08-31
US7976844B2 US7976844B2 (en) 2011-07-12

Family

ID=40253655

Family Applications (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/886,349 Expired - Lifetime US7083796B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2001-06-20 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/418,848 Expired - Fee Related US7976844B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2006-05-05 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,459 Abandoned US20080317716A1 (en) 2000-06-20 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,142 Expired - Lifetime US7973153B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,211 Abandoned US20080161263A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/980,961 Abandoned US20090004226A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US12/490,272 Expired - Fee Related US8071747B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2009-06-23 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/886,349 Expired - Lifetime US7083796B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2001-06-20 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Family Applications After (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/981,459 Abandoned US20080317716A1 (en) 2000-06-20 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,142 Expired - Lifetime US7973153B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/981,211 Abandoned US20080161263A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US11/980,961 Abandoned US20090004226A1 (en) 1998-12-30 2007-10-30 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US12/490,272 Expired - Fee Related US8071747B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2009-06-23 Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (7) US7083796B2 (en)
EP (2) EP1542732B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5139618B2 (en)
AT (2) ATE442866T1 (en)
AU (2) AU6867801A (en)
CA (1) CA2413959C (en)
CY (2) CY1109531T1 (en)
DE (1) DE60139963D1 (en)
DK (2) DK1542732T3 (en)
ES (2) ES2333579T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1080506A1 (en)
PT (2) PT2133100E (en)
SI (1) SI1542732T1 (en)
WO (1) WO2001098460A2 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070054336A1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2007-03-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20080199405A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2008-08-21 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20080269151A1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2008-10-30 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20090018095A1 (en) * 2001-02-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20090017077A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20090281168A1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2009-11-12 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US20100183677A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2010-07-22 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7906277B2 (en) 1995-09-01 2011-03-15 Corixa Corporation Compound and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis

Families Citing this family (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1517913B9 (en) * 1999-10-07 2007-08-29 Corixa Corporation A mycobacterium tuberculosis coding sequence for exression of heterologous proteins
EP1812580B1 (en) 2004-11-16 2014-12-17 Crucell Holland B.V. Multivalent vaccines comprising recombinant viral vectors
JP5164830B2 (en) 2005-04-29 2013-03-21 グラクソスミスクライン バイオロジカルズ ソシエテ アノニム A novel method for the prevention or treatment of Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection
AU2011224145B2 (en) * 2005-04-29 2013-05-16 Glaxosmithkline Biologicals S.A. Novel method for preventing or treating M tuberculosis infection
UA98605C2 (en) * 2005-04-29 2012-06-11 ГлаксоСмитКлайн Байолоджикалз с.а. Novel method for preventing or treating m. tuberculosis infection
EP1904848A2 (en) * 2005-04-29 2008-04-02 Fusion Antibodies Limited Assays for diagnosis of tuberculosis and uses thereof
WO2007041539A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2007-04-12 Transcutaneous Technologies, Inc. Iontophoresis apparatus and method for the diagnosis of tuberculosis
US8486414B2 (en) * 2007-04-04 2013-07-16 Infectious Disease Research Institute Immunogenic compositions comprising Mycobacterium tuberculosis polypeptides and fusions thereof
WO2009049097A1 (en) * 2007-10-13 2009-04-16 Cornell University Compositions for eliciting an immune response against mycobacterium avium subspecies paratuberculosis
KR101378240B1 (en) * 2008-02-22 2014-03-28 포항공과대학교 산학협력단 A pharmaceutical composition for preventing tuberculosis
UA107180C2 (en) 2008-07-25 2014-12-10 Глаксосмітклайн Байолоджікалз С.А. Rv1753c tuberculosis protein, composition containing it and administration
LT2315834T (en) 2008-07-25 2018-09-10 Glaxosmithkline Biologicals S.A. THE TUBERCULOSIS Rv2386c PROTEIN, COMPOSITIONS AND USES THEREOF
US20110117119A1 (en) * 2008-07-25 2011-05-19 Pascal Mettens Novel compositions and methods
KR20120129927A (en) * 2010-01-27 2012-11-28 글락소 그룹 리미티드 Modified tuberculosis antigens
JP5951634B2 (en) 2010-12-14 2016-07-13 グラクソスミスクライン バイオロジカルズ ソシエテ アノニム Mycobacterium antigenic composition
US20150196627A1 (en) * 2011-10-24 2015-07-16 University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Plastid-expressed mycobacterium tuberculosis vaccine antigens esat-6 and mtb72f fused to cholera toxin b subunit
EP2812704A4 (en) * 2012-02-07 2016-03-23 Intuitive Biosciences Inc Mycobacterium tuberculosis specific peptides for detection of infection or immunization in non-human primates
MX347154B (en) 2012-02-24 2017-02-21 Centro De Investigación Científica Y De Educación Superior De Ensenada Baja California (Cicese) Diagnostic test for infectious diseases in cattle.
GB201513176D0 (en) * 2015-07-27 2015-09-09 Glaxosmithkline Biolog Sa Novel methods for inducing an immune response

Citations (65)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3943119A (en) * 1973-06-28 1976-03-09 Mitsui Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated Tuberculin active proteins and peptides from the cells of tubercle bacilli
US4235877A (en) * 1979-06-27 1980-11-25 Merck & Co., Inc. Liposome particle containing viral or bacterial antigenic subunit
US4436727A (en) * 1982-05-26 1984-03-13 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Refined detoxified endotoxin product
US4603112A (en) * 1981-12-24 1986-07-29 Health Research, Incorporated Modified vaccinia virus
US4689397A (en) * 1985-08-12 1987-08-25 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Synthetic polypeptides for detecting mycobacterial infections
US4751180A (en) * 1985-03-28 1988-06-14 Chiron Corporation Expression using fused genes providing for protein product
US4769330A (en) * 1981-12-24 1988-09-06 Health Research, Incorporated Modified vaccinia virus and methods for making and using the same
US4777127A (en) * 1985-09-30 1988-10-11 Labsystems Oy Human retrovirus-related products and methods of diagnosing and treating conditions associated with said retrovirus
US4866034A (en) * 1982-05-26 1989-09-12 Ribi Immunochem Research Inc. Refined detoxified endotoxin
US4876089A (en) * 1984-09-06 1989-10-24 Chiron Corporation Feline leukemia virus protein vaccines
US4877611A (en) * 1986-04-15 1989-10-31 Ribi Immunochem Research Inc. Vaccine containing tumor antigens and adjuvants
US4879213A (en) * 1986-12-05 1989-11-07 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Synthetic polypeptides and antibodies related to Epstein-Barr virus early antigen-diffuse
US4897268A (en) * 1987-08-03 1990-01-30 Southern Research Institute Drug delivery system and method of making the same
US4912094A (en) * 1988-06-29 1990-03-27 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Modified lipopolysaccharides and process of preparation
US4935233A (en) * 1985-12-02 1990-06-19 G. D. Searle And Company Covalently linked polypeptide cell modulators
US4946778A (en) * 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
US4952395A (en) * 1987-02-26 1990-08-28 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Mycobacterial recombinants and peptides
US5108745A (en) * 1988-08-16 1992-04-28 The Regents Of The University Of California Tuberculosis and legionellosis vaccines and methods for their production
US5145684A (en) * 1991-01-25 1992-09-08 Sterling Drug Inc. Surface modified drug nanoparticles
US5240856A (en) * 1991-10-23 1993-08-31 Cellpro Incorporated Apparatus for cell separation
US5330754A (en) * 1992-06-29 1994-07-19 Archana Kapoor Membrane-associated immunogens of mycobacteria
US5478726A (en) * 1987-02-26 1995-12-26 The Scripps Research Institute Mycobacterial recombinants and peptides
US5504005A (en) * 1987-03-02 1996-04-02 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Recombinant mycobacterial vaccine
US5565213A (en) * 1990-07-26 1996-10-15 Taisho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Stable liposome aqueous suspension
US5567434A (en) * 1989-03-31 1996-10-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Preparation of liposome and lipid complex compositions
US5580579A (en) * 1995-02-15 1996-12-03 Nano Systems L.L.C. Site-specific adhesion within the GI tract using nanoparticles stabilized by high molecular weight, linear poly (ethylene oxide) polymers
US5583112A (en) * 1987-05-29 1996-12-10 Cambridge Biotech Corporation Saponin-antigen conjugates and the use thereof
US5599545A (en) * 1990-05-07 1997-02-04 University College London Mycobacterium as adjuvant for antigens
US5616500A (en) * 1993-04-30 1997-04-01 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health & Human Services Trichohyalin and transglutaminase-3 and methods of using same
US5639653A (en) * 1993-07-19 1997-06-17 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University, A Division Of Yeshiva Universtiy Method for proliferating Vγ2Vδ2 T cells
US5714593A (en) * 1995-02-01 1998-02-03 Institut Pasteur DNA from mycobacterium tuberculosis which codes for a 45/47 kilodalton protein
US5780045A (en) * 1992-05-18 1998-07-14 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Transmucosal drug delivery device
US5783368A (en) * 1994-12-24 1998-07-21 Alcatel N.V. Method of forming conductive paths on a substrate containing depressions
US5783386A (en) * 1994-02-24 1998-07-21 Agresearch, New Zealand Pastoral Agriculture Research Institute Ltd. Mycobacteria virulence factors and a novel method for their identification
US5795587A (en) * 1995-01-23 1998-08-18 University Of Pittsburgh Stable lipid-comprising drug delivery complexes and methods for their production
US5804212A (en) * 1989-11-04 1998-09-08 Danbiosyst Uk Limited Small particle compositions for intranasal drug delivery
US5811128A (en) * 1986-10-24 1998-09-22 Southern Research Institute Method for oral or rectal delivery of microencapsulated vaccines and compositions therefor
US5817473A (en) * 1992-12-17 1998-10-06 Kreatech Biotechnology B.V. Method and device for identifying a mycobacterium species responsible for a mycobacterial infection
US5856462A (en) * 1996-09-10 1999-01-05 Hybridon Incorporated Oligonucleotides having modified CpG dinucleosides
US5928647A (en) * 1993-01-11 1999-07-27 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute Inducing cytotoxic T lymphocyte responses
US5955077A (en) * 1993-07-02 1999-09-21 Statens Seruminstitut Tuberculosis vaccine
US5985287A (en) * 1996-08-29 1999-11-16 Genesis Research And Development Corporation Limited Compounds and methods for treatment and diagnosis of mycobacterial infections
US6001361A (en) * 1996-08-29 1999-12-14 Genesis Research & Development Corporation Limited Mycobacterium vaccae antigens
US6034218A (en) * 1996-03-15 2000-03-07 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and immunodiagnosis of prostate cancer
US6037135A (en) * 1992-08-07 2000-03-14 Epimmune Inc. Methods for making HLA binding peptides and their uses
US6113918A (en) * 1997-05-08 2000-09-05 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Aminoalkyl glucosamine phosphate compounds and their use as adjuvants and immunoeffectors
US6290969B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2001-09-18 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6338852B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2002-01-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6350456B1 (en) * 1997-03-13 2002-02-26 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the prevention and treatment of M. tuberculosis infection
US6355257B1 (en) * 1997-05-08 2002-03-12 Corixa Corporation Aminoalkyl glucosamine phosphate compounds and their use as adjuvants and immunoeffectors
US6458366B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2002-10-01 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6465633B1 (en) * 1998-12-24 2002-10-15 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods of their use in the treatment, prevention and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6544522B1 (en) * 1998-12-30 2003-04-08 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US6555653B2 (en) * 1997-05-20 2003-04-29 Corixa Corporation Compounds for diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods for their use
US6592877B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2003-07-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6613881B1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2003-09-02 Corixa Corporation Compounds for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods of their use
US6627198B2 (en) * 1997-03-13 2003-09-30 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US7026465B2 (en) * 2002-02-15 2006-04-11 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7083796B2 (en) * 2000-06-20 2006-08-01 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7087713B2 (en) * 2000-02-25 2006-08-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20060281168A1 (en) * 2005-06-13 2006-12-14 Tosoh Corporation Cell fusion chamber, cell fusion device, and method for cell fusion using the same
US7186412B1 (en) * 1998-04-07 2007-03-06 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7311922B1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2007-12-25 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20090281168A1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2009-11-12 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US20100045096A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2010-02-25 Continental Teves Ag & Co. Ohg Motor/Pump Assembly

Family Cites Families (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2244539A1 (en) 1973-07-13 1975-04-18 Mitsui Pharmaceuticals Tuberculin active proteins and peptides prepn - from tubercle bacillus
FR2265402A1 (en) 1974-03-29 1975-10-24 Mitsui Pharmaceuticals Tuberculin active proteins and peptides prepn - from tubercle bacillus
GB8508845D0 (en) 1985-04-04 1985-05-09 Hoffmann La Roche Vaccinia dna
US5075109A (en) 1986-10-24 1991-12-24 Southern Research Institute Method of potentiating an immune response
GB8702816D0 (en) 1987-02-07 1987-03-11 Al Sumidaie A M K Obtaining retrovirus-containing fraction
WO1989001973A2 (en) 1987-09-02 1989-03-09 Applied Biotechnology, Inc. Recombinant pox virus for immunization against tumor-associated antigens
EP0398880A4 (en) 1988-01-04 1990-12-27 E.I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Multiple stage affinity process for isolation of specific cells from a cell mixture
AP129A (en) 1988-06-03 1991-04-17 Smithkline Biologicals S A Expression of retrovirus gag protein eukaryotic cells
EP0845537A1 (en) 1989-08-18 1998-06-03 Chiron Corporation Recombinant retroviruses delivering vector constructs to target cells
US5725871A (en) 1989-08-18 1998-03-10 Danbiosyst Uk Limited Drug delivery compositions comprising lysophosphoglycerolipid
KR920007887B1 (en) 1989-08-29 1992-09-18 스즈키 지도오샤 고오교오 가부시키가이샤 Exhaust gas cleaning device for internal combustion engine
EP0419355B1 (en) 1989-09-19 2000-02-09 N.V. Innogenetics S.A. Recombinant polypeptides and peptides, nucleic acids coding for the same and use of these polypeptides and peptides in the diagnostic of tuberculosis
US5466468A (en) 1990-04-03 1995-11-14 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Parenterally administrable liposome formulation comprising synthetic lipids
SE466259B (en) 1990-05-31 1992-01-20 Arne Forsgren PROTEIN D - AN IGD BINDING PROTEIN FROM HAEMOPHILUS INFLUENZAE, AND THE USE OF THIS FOR ANALYSIS, VACCINES AND PURPOSE
JP2958076B2 (en) 1990-08-27 1999-10-06 株式会社ビタミン研究所 Multilamellar liposome for gene transfer and gene-captured multilamellar liposome preparation and method for producing the same
ATE154698T1 (en) 1990-10-18 1997-07-15 Cellpro Inc DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SEPARATING PARTICLES USING A FLEXIBLE VESSEL
US5399363A (en) 1991-01-25 1995-03-21 Eastman Kodak Company Surface modified anticancer nanoparticles
RU2024021C1 (en) 1991-05-05 1994-11-30 Научно-исследовательский институт хирургии Восточно-Сибирского филиала СО РАМН Method of tuberculosis diagnosis
DE4116249A1 (en) 1991-05-17 1992-11-19 Biotechnolog Forschung Gmbh HYBRID PLASMIDE FOR M. TUBERCULOSIS ANTIGEN, E. COLI AS A HOST AND ANTIGEN
JPH07501687A (en) 1991-08-15 1995-02-23 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・バイオロジカルス(ソシエテ・アノニム) OSP A protein of subgroup Borrelia burgdorferi, gene encoding it, and vaccine
US5756353A (en) 1991-12-17 1998-05-26 The Regents Of The University Of California Expression of cloned genes in the lung by aerosol-and liposome-based delivery
US5792451A (en) 1994-03-02 1998-08-11 Emisphere Technologies, Inc. Oral drug delivery compositions and methods
CZ282235B6 (en) 1992-06-25 1997-06-11 Smithkline Beecham Biologicals (S.A.) Inoculation substance, process of its preparation and use
FR2702160B1 (en) 1993-03-02 1995-06-02 Biovecteurs As Synthetic particulate vectors and method of preparation.
FR2704145B1 (en) 1993-04-21 1995-07-21 Pasteur Institut Particulate vector and pharmaceutical composition containing it.
US5543158A (en) 1993-07-23 1996-08-06 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Biodegradable injectable nanoparticles
US6008201A (en) 1993-09-02 1999-12-28 Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. DNA molecule encoding for cellular uptake of mycobacterium tuberculosis and uses thereof
GB9326253D0 (en) 1993-12-23 1994-02-23 Smithkline Beecham Biolog Vaccines
US5741516A (en) 1994-06-20 1998-04-21 Inex Pharmaceuticals Corporation Sphingosomes for enhanced drug delivery
US5551622A (en) 1994-07-13 1996-09-03 Yoon; Inbae Surgical stapler
PT772619E (en) 1994-07-15 2006-10-31 Univ Iowa Res Found OLIGONUCLEOTIDOS IMUNOMODULADORES
FR2723849B1 (en) 1994-08-31 1997-04-11 Biovector Therapeutics Sa PROCESS FOR INCREASING IMMUNOGENICITY, PRODUCT OBTAINED AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION
AU706367B2 (en) 1995-03-13 1999-06-17 Astra Aktiebolag New DNA molecules
IE80468B1 (en) 1995-04-04 1998-07-29 Elan Corp Plc Controlled release biodegradable nanoparticles containing insulin
UA56132C2 (en) 1995-04-25 2003-05-15 Смітклайн Бічем Байолоджікалс С.А. Vaccine composition (variants), method for stabilizing qs21 providing resistance against hydrolysis (variants), method for manufacturing vaccine
EP0832282A1 (en) 1995-06-02 1998-04-01 Incyte Pharmaceuticals, Inc. IMPROVED METHOD FOR OBTAINING FULL-LENGTH cDNA SEQUENCES
US5738868A (en) 1995-07-18 1998-04-14 Lipogenics Ltd. Liposome compositions and kits therefor
MX9801638A (en) 1995-09-01 1998-05-31 Corixa Corp Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis.
AU7158796A (en) 1995-09-01 1997-03-27 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
JP2002515734A (en) 1996-01-02 2002-05-28 カイロン コーポレイション Immunostimulation mediated by genetically modified dendritic cells
US20020068285A1 (en) 1996-01-11 2002-06-06 Frudakis Tony N. Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of breast cancer
CZ126699A3 (en) 1996-10-11 1999-09-15 Corixa Corporation Polypeptide containing antigenic part of soluble antigen m. tuberculosis or variant of said antigen, dna molecule encoding such polypeptide, expression vector, host cell, diagnostic methods of m. tuberculosis infection and diagnostic kits
GB9727262D0 (en) 1997-12-24 1998-02-25 Smithkline Beecham Biolog Vaccine
SI1659178T1 (en) 1998-02-05 2010-07-30 Glaxosmithkline Biolog Sa A process for the purification or production of a MAGE protein
CA2325939A1 (en) 1998-04-09 1999-10-21 Martin Friede Vaccine
DK1104306T3 (en) 1998-08-10 2006-05-22 Antigenics Inc Preparations of CpG and Saponin Adjuvants and Methods for Using Them
WO2001004143A2 (en) * 1999-07-13 2001-01-18 Smithkline Beecham Biologicals S.A. Prostase vaccine
EP1517913B9 (en) * 1999-10-07 2007-08-29 Corixa Corporation A mycobacterium tuberculosis coding sequence for exression of heterologous proteins
JP2004537252A (en) 1999-11-12 2004-12-16 コリクサ コーポレイション Compositions and methods for treatment and diagnosis of prostate cancer
AU3447401A (en) 2000-01-14 2001-07-24 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of prostate cancer
US7472098B2 (en) 2000-02-14 2008-12-30 Ubs Financial Services, Inc. System and method for execution of trades made pursuant to stock option and purchase plans
EP1311673A2 (en) 2000-03-27 2003-05-21 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of prostate cancer
CN101570594B (en) 2002-02-14 2012-06-20 三井化学株式会社 Polyester resin and catalyst for polyester production, process for producing polyester resin with the catalyst
JP2008527947A (en) 2005-01-19 2008-07-24 パンデュイット・コーポレーション Communication channel with suppression core
US7296798B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2007-11-20 Matt Overfield Gameboard, games played on board and methods of play requiring strategy and luck
JP4630844B2 (en) * 2006-05-29 2011-02-09 パナソニック株式会社 Optical pickup device
CA2768777C (en) 2009-07-21 2017-11-28 Cooper Technologies Company Interfacing a light emitting diode (led) module to a heat sink assembly, a light reflector and electrical circuits
US9119754B2 (en) 2011-10-08 2015-09-01 Michael Dennis Mattress overlay system with positionally adjustable, lateral ramp-wedge bolster structure
US9051890B2 (en) 2013-10-28 2015-06-09 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Method for estimating charge air cooler condensation storage with an intake oxygen sensor
US9810514B2 (en) 2015-09-08 2017-11-07 Deufol Sunman Inc. Ammunition carrier consumer package

Patent Citations (95)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3943119A (en) * 1973-06-28 1976-03-09 Mitsui Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated Tuberculin active proteins and peptides from the cells of tubercle bacilli
US4235877A (en) * 1979-06-27 1980-11-25 Merck & Co., Inc. Liposome particle containing viral or bacterial antigenic subunit
US4603112A (en) * 1981-12-24 1986-07-29 Health Research, Incorporated Modified vaccinia virus
US4769330A (en) * 1981-12-24 1988-09-06 Health Research, Incorporated Modified vaccinia virus and methods for making and using the same
US4436727A (en) * 1982-05-26 1984-03-13 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Refined detoxified endotoxin product
US4866034A (en) * 1982-05-26 1989-09-12 Ribi Immunochem Research Inc. Refined detoxified endotoxin
US4876089A (en) * 1984-09-06 1989-10-24 Chiron Corporation Feline leukemia virus protein vaccines
US4751180A (en) * 1985-03-28 1988-06-14 Chiron Corporation Expression using fused genes providing for protein product
US4689397A (en) * 1985-08-12 1987-08-25 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Synthetic polypeptides for detecting mycobacterial infections
US4777127A (en) * 1985-09-30 1988-10-11 Labsystems Oy Human retrovirus-related products and methods of diagnosing and treating conditions associated with said retrovirus
US4935233A (en) * 1985-12-02 1990-06-19 G. D. Searle And Company Covalently linked polypeptide cell modulators
US4877611A (en) * 1986-04-15 1989-10-31 Ribi Immunochem Research Inc. Vaccine containing tumor antigens and adjuvants
US5942252A (en) * 1986-10-24 1999-08-24 Southern Research Institute Method for delivering bioactive agents into and through the mucosally-associated lymphoid tissues and controlling their release
US5811128A (en) * 1986-10-24 1998-09-22 Southern Research Institute Method for oral or rectal delivery of microencapsulated vaccines and compositions therefor
US5814344A (en) * 1986-10-24 1998-09-29 Southern Research Institute Method for delivering bioactive agents into and through the mucosally associated lymphoid tissues and controlling their release
US5820883A (en) * 1986-10-24 1998-10-13 Southern Research Institute Method for delivering bioactive agents into and through the mucosally-associated lymphoid tissues and controlling their release
US4879213A (en) * 1986-12-05 1989-11-07 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Synthetic polypeptides and antibodies related to Epstein-Barr virus early antigen-diffuse
US5478726A (en) * 1987-02-26 1995-12-26 The Scripps Research Institute Mycobacterial recombinants and peptides
US4952395A (en) * 1987-02-26 1990-08-28 Scripps Clinic And Research Foundation Mycobacterial recombinants and peptides
US5504005A (en) * 1987-03-02 1996-04-02 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University Recombinant mycobacterial vaccine
US5583112A (en) * 1987-05-29 1996-12-10 Cambridge Biotech Corporation Saponin-antigen conjugates and the use thereof
US4897268A (en) * 1987-08-03 1990-01-30 Southern Research Institute Drug delivery system and method of making the same
US4946778A (en) * 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
US4912094B1 (en) * 1988-06-29 1994-02-15 Ribi Immunochem Research Inc. Modified lipopolysaccharides and process of preparation
US4912094A (en) * 1988-06-29 1990-03-27 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Modified lipopolysaccharides and process of preparation
US5108745A (en) * 1988-08-16 1992-04-28 The Regents Of The University Of California Tuberculosis and legionellosis vaccines and methods for their production
US5108745B1 (en) * 1988-08-16 1998-06-30 Univ California Tuberculosis and legionellosis vaccines and methods for their production
US5567434A (en) * 1989-03-31 1996-10-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Preparation of liposome and lipid complex compositions
US5804212A (en) * 1989-11-04 1998-09-08 Danbiosyst Uk Limited Small particle compositions for intranasal drug delivery
US5599545A (en) * 1990-05-07 1997-02-04 University College London Mycobacterium as adjuvant for antigens
US5565213A (en) * 1990-07-26 1996-10-15 Taisho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Stable liposome aqueous suspension
US5145684A (en) * 1991-01-25 1992-09-08 Sterling Drug Inc. Surface modified drug nanoparticles
US5240856A (en) * 1991-10-23 1993-08-31 Cellpro Incorporated Apparatus for cell separation
US5780045A (en) * 1992-05-18 1998-07-14 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Transmucosal drug delivery device
US5330754A (en) * 1992-06-29 1994-07-19 Archana Kapoor Membrane-associated immunogens of mycobacteria
US6037135A (en) * 1992-08-07 2000-03-14 Epimmune Inc. Methods for making HLA binding peptides and their uses
US5817473A (en) * 1992-12-17 1998-10-06 Kreatech Biotechnology B.V. Method and device for identifying a mycobacterium species responsible for a mycobacterial infection
US5928647A (en) * 1993-01-11 1999-07-27 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute Inducing cytotoxic T lymphocyte responses
US5616500A (en) * 1993-04-30 1997-04-01 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health & Human Services Trichohyalin and transglutaminase-3 and methods of using same
US5955077A (en) * 1993-07-02 1999-09-21 Statens Seruminstitut Tuberculosis vaccine
US5639653A (en) * 1993-07-19 1997-06-17 Albert Einstein College Of Medicine Of Yeshiva University, A Division Of Yeshiva Universtiy Method for proliferating Vγ2Vδ2 T cells
US5783386A (en) * 1994-02-24 1998-07-21 Agresearch, New Zealand Pastoral Agriculture Research Institute Ltd. Mycobacteria virulence factors and a novel method for their identification
US5783368A (en) * 1994-12-24 1998-07-21 Alcatel N.V. Method of forming conductive paths on a substrate containing depressions
US5795587A (en) * 1995-01-23 1998-08-18 University Of Pittsburgh Stable lipid-comprising drug delivery complexes and methods for their production
US5714593A (en) * 1995-02-01 1998-02-03 Institut Pasteur DNA from mycobacterium tuberculosis which codes for a 45/47 kilodalton protein
US5580579A (en) * 1995-02-15 1996-12-03 Nano Systems L.L.C. Site-specific adhesion within the GI tract using nanoparticles stabilized by high molecular weight, linear poly (ethylene oxide) polymers
US6592877B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2003-07-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20090017077A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20090312244A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2009-12-17 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20080199405A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2008-08-21 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6290969B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2001-09-18 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6338852B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2002-01-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US7238358B2 (en) * 1995-09-01 2007-07-03 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20070141087A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2007-06-21 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6458366B1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2002-10-01 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US7122196B2 (en) * 1995-09-01 2006-10-17 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6962710B2 (en) * 1995-09-01 2005-11-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6949246B2 (en) * 1995-09-01 2005-09-27 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US6034218A (en) * 1996-03-15 2000-03-07 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and immunodiagnosis of prostate cancer
US5985287A (en) * 1996-08-29 1999-11-16 Genesis Research And Development Corporation Limited Compounds and methods for treatment and diagnosis of mycobacterial infections
US6001361A (en) * 1996-08-29 1999-12-14 Genesis Research & Development Corporation Limited Mycobacterium vaccae antigens
US5856462A (en) * 1996-09-10 1999-01-05 Hybridon Incorporated Oligonucleotides having modified CpG dinucleosides
US6627198B2 (en) * 1997-03-13 2003-09-30 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US7335369B2 (en) * 1997-03-13 2008-02-26 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US6977069B2 (en) * 1997-03-13 2005-12-20 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US6350456B1 (en) * 1997-03-13 2002-02-26 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the prevention and treatment of M. tuberculosis infection
US6113918A (en) * 1997-05-08 2000-09-05 Ribi Immunochem Research, Inc. Aminoalkyl glucosamine phosphate compounds and their use as adjuvants and immunoeffectors
US6355257B1 (en) * 1997-05-08 2002-03-12 Corixa Corporation Aminoalkyl glucosamine phosphate compounds and their use as adjuvants and immunoeffectors
US6613881B1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2003-09-02 Corixa Corporation Compounds for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods of their use
US20070054336A1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2007-03-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US6555653B2 (en) * 1997-05-20 2003-04-29 Corixa Corporation Compounds for diagnosis of tuberculosis and methods for their use
US7261897B2 (en) * 1998-04-07 2007-08-28 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7186412B1 (en) * 1998-04-07 2007-03-06 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20080176798A1 (en) * 1998-05-05 2008-07-24 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20090022742A1 (en) * 1998-05-05 2009-01-22 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US6465633B1 (en) * 1998-12-24 2002-10-15 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods of their use in the treatment, prevention and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20090004226A1 (en) * 1998-12-30 2009-01-01 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7064195B2 (en) * 1998-12-30 2006-06-20 Corixa Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US6544522B1 (en) * 1998-12-30 2003-04-08 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US20090281168A1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2009-11-12 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US20090306195A1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2009-12-10 Corixa Corporation Fusion Proteins of Mycobacterium Tuberculosis
US20080269151A1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2008-10-30 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7311922B1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2007-12-25 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7087713B2 (en) * 2000-02-25 2006-08-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20080317716A1 (en) * 2000-06-20 2008-12-25 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7083796B2 (en) * 2000-06-20 2006-08-01 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20090018095A1 (en) * 2001-02-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7026465B2 (en) * 2002-02-15 2006-04-11 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20080242630A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2008-10-02 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20070184074A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2007-08-09 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7691993B2 (en) * 2002-02-15 2010-04-06 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20100183657A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2010-07-22 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20100183677A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2010-07-22 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20060281168A1 (en) * 2005-06-13 2006-12-14 Tosoh Corporation Cell fusion chamber, cell fusion device, and method for cell fusion using the same
US20100045096A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2010-02-25 Continental Teves Ag & Co. Ohg Motor/Pump Assembly

Cited By (25)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7906277B2 (en) 1995-09-01 2011-03-15 Corixa Corporation Compound and methods for diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20080199405A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2008-08-21 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US8084042B2 (en) 1995-09-01 2011-12-27 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US7989605B2 (en) 1995-09-01 2011-08-02 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20090017077A1 (en) * 1995-09-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US7927609B2 (en) 1995-09-01 2011-04-19 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for immunotherapy and diagnosis of tuberculosis
US20110142871A1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2011-06-16 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US7935353B2 (en) 1997-05-20 2011-05-03 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20070054336A1 (en) * 1997-05-20 2007-03-08 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US7927610B2 (en) 1998-05-05 2011-04-19 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US7927611B2 (en) 1998-05-05 2011-04-19 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US20090022742A1 (en) * 1998-05-05 2009-01-22 Corixa Corporation Compounds and methods for diagnosis and immunotherapy of tuberculosis
US8071747B2 (en) 1998-12-30 2011-12-06 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20100015096A1 (en) * 1998-12-30 2010-01-21 Corixa Corporation Fusion Proteins of Mycobacterium Tuberculosis
US20090281168A1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2009-11-12 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US8143386B2 (en) 1999-04-07 2012-03-27 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis antigens and their uses
US8067016B2 (en) 1999-10-07 2011-11-29 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7982025B2 (en) 1999-10-07 2011-07-19 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20080269151A1 (en) * 1999-10-07 2008-10-30 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7976844B2 (en) 2000-06-20 2011-07-12 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20090018095A1 (en) * 2001-02-01 2009-01-15 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7973153B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2011-07-05 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US20100183677A1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2010-07-22 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US8110201B2 (en) 2002-02-15 2012-02-07 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US8110200B2 (en) 2002-02-15 2012-02-07 Corixa Corporation Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
DE60139963D1 (en) 2009-10-29
ES2333579T3 (en) 2010-02-24
EP1542732B1 (en) 2009-09-16
WO2001098460A2 (en) 2001-12-27
ATE442866T1 (en) 2009-10-15
US20090004226A1 (en) 2009-01-01
HK1080506A1 (en) 2006-04-28
US20090018095A1 (en) 2009-01-15
EP1542732A2 (en) 2005-06-22
US20100015096A1 (en) 2010-01-21
EP1542732A4 (en) 2005-11-02
WO2001098460A3 (en) 2004-10-28
JP2012034695A (en) 2012-02-23
CY1109531T1 (en) 2014-08-13
JP5139618B2 (en) 2013-02-06
DK2133100T3 (en) 2012-01-23
US7973153B2 (en) 2011-07-05
US20040086523A1 (en) 2004-05-06
PT2133100E (en) 2012-01-11
CY1112171T1 (en) 2015-12-09
ATE526994T1 (en) 2011-10-15
US8071747B2 (en) 2011-12-06
EP2133100A1 (en) 2009-12-16
AU6867801A (en) 2002-01-02
CA2413959A1 (en) 2001-12-27
SI1542732T1 (en) 2010-01-29
ES2374620T3 (en) 2012-02-20
PT1542732E (en) 2009-11-06
JP2004526405A (en) 2004-09-02
EP2133100B1 (en) 2011-10-05
CA2413959C (en) 2015-07-07
US20080161263A1 (en) 2008-07-03
AU2001268678B2 (en) 2006-11-16
US7976844B2 (en) 2011-07-12
DK1542732T3 (en) 2009-12-14
US7083796B2 (en) 2006-08-01
US20080317716A1 (en) 2008-12-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7976844B2 (en) Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7261897B2 (en) Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7982025B2 (en) Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
US7678375B2 (en) Fusion proteins of Mycobacterium tuberculosis
CA2607715C (en) Novel method for preventing or treating m tuberculosis infection
AU2001268678A1 (en) Fusion proteins of mycobacterium tuberculosis

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 8

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: MAINTENANCE FEE REMINDER MAILED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: REM.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED FOR FAILURE TO PAY MAINTENANCE FEES (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: EXP.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

STCH Information on status: patent discontinuation

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362

FP Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee

Effective date: 20230712